JP6978674B2 - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a pachinko gaming machine.

In general, a pachinko gaming machine acquires a random number value for lottery when a gaming ball enters the starting port, and temporarily stores the random value up to a predetermined upper limit as an operation pending ball. Each such operation-holding ball is sequentially digested one by one each time a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a hit / fail determination as to whether or not it corresponds to a big hit is executed. If the result of the winning / failing judgment is a big hit, the symbol consisting of multiple rows is displayed in a variable manner, and then the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode, and the large winning opening, which is normally closed, is opened. A special game (big hit game) to be played is established.

In this type of pachinko gaming machine, there is known one that outputs game information related to the operating status of the gaming machine as an external information signal to an external device arranged outside the gaming machine (for example, Patent Document 1). See).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-325753

Since there are already many pachinko gaming machines that adopt such a configuration as conventional models, it is necessary to further improve the interest of the game in order to differentiate it from the conventional models.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to achieve such an object, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed, and a first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area and into which a gaming ball can enter. , The hit / fail judgment is executed when the second starting port, which is provided at a position different from the first starting port of the gaming area and is capable of entering the game ball, and the entering of the game ball into the first starting opening. A first hit / fail determination means for performing a hit / fail determination, a second hit / fail determination means for executing a hit / miss determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port, and a hit / fail determination means provided in the game area. A large winning opening that is opened according to the result of the determination or the result of the hit / fail determination by the second hit / fail determination means, and a combination operating gate provided in the game area where the game ball can pass. When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means becomes a big hit, the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed by the big hit symbol indicating the big hit. After that, when the game ball passes through the winning combination operation gate, a special game executing means capable of executing a big hit game accompanied by opening of the big winning opening, and a winning / failing determination by the first winning / failing determination means. The low probability state in which the result and the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means become a big hit with a predetermined probability, the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means, and the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means are described above. A lottery state control means that has a high probability state in which a big hit is made with a higher probability than a predetermined probability and can execute a setting of a low probability state or a setting of a high probability state, and a result of a hit / fail determination by the first hit / fail determination means. A first symbol display device in which the first symbol indicating the above is variable display and stop display, and a second symbol display device in which the second symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail determination by the second hit / fail determination means is variable display and stop display. The first symbol display control means for variable display and stop display of the first symbol in the first symbol display device, and the second symbol display control means for variable display and stop display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. The first fluctuation state in which the average value of the fluctuation display time of the second symbol is a predetermined time, and the second fluctuation state in which the average value of the fluctuation display time of the second symbol is shorter than the predetermined time are at least. A variable state control means capable of at least executing the setting of the first variable state or the setting of the second variable state, and the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means. Is displayed to suggest The above-mentioned first as an external information signal that can be output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine, which is a pachinko gaming machine provided with an effect display device and an effect determining means for determining the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device. (1) The result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / miss determination means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail determination means becomes a big hit, so that the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed by the big hit symbol indicating the big hit. The second symbol indicates the jackpot by having at least a predetermined external information signal output as an opportunity, and in a high probability state and a second fluctuation state, the result of the hit / fail determination by the second hit / miss determination means becomes a big hit. When the stop display is displayed with the jackpot symbol, even if the gaming ball does not pass through the winning combination operation gate, a predetermined external information signal is output after the stop display is displayed with the jackpot symbol, while the low probability state and the first fluctuation In the state, when the result of the hit / fail determination by the second hit / fail determination means becomes a big hit and the second symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol indicating the big hit, the game ball is stopped and displayed after the big hit symbol. Is not output of a predetermined external information signal unless it passes through the combination operating gate, and is characterized in that a predetermined external information signal is output when the gaming ball passes through the combination operation gate after the stop display is displayed on the jackpot symbol. And.

According to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a rear view of the said pachinko gaming machine. It is a control block diagram of the said pachinko gaming machine. It is a functional block diagram of the main control board and the effect control board of the said pachinko gaming machine. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol winning / failing lottery table. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the big hit non-lottery process in the winning / failing determination of a special symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first special symbol jackpot symbol table, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. It is a transition diagram of a game state and an effect mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the game state setting table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 1. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 2. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 3. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 4. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 5. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a normal symbol winning / failing lottery table, (B) is a schematic diagram showing a normal symbol variation pattern table, and (C) is a schematic diagram showing a normal electric accessory opening pattern table. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the simultaneous fluctuation processing of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the flow of the latent mode fanning effect. It is a transition diagram for demonstrating the change of the fluctuation state at the time of transitioning from a latent probability change game state to a normal game state. It is a time chart of the jackpot signal output from the external information terminal board. It is a time chart of the signal during the consecutive villas output from the external information terminal board. It is a time chart of a symbol confirmation signal output from an external information terminal board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 22 of the main control side main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing of a main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the start port monitoring control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start monitoring control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control general-purpose processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during the special symbol stop symbol display. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 33 of the process during special symbol stop symbol display. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 35 of the special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 36 of the special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the reset start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing on the effect control side. It is a flowchart which shows the image control command transmission interrupt processing. It is a transition diagram of the game state and the effect mode in the modified example of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect mode table in the modification of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect example of the remaining number of times notification in the modification of this embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a time chart of the invincible zone production of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the basic screen of the invincible zone effect of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the fluctuation interruption processing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of the residual fluctuation time notification effect of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of the 3rd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the game state setting table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a fluctuation time comparison table of the special symbol of the 3rd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a normal symbol winning / failing lottery table of the third embodiment, (B) is a schematic diagram showing a normal symbol variation pattern table of the third embodiment, and (C) is a normal electric motor of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the thing opening pattern table. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table of the fourth embodiment, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing the second special symbol jackpot symbol table of the fourth embodiment. It is a fluctuation time comparison table of the special symbol of 4th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[First Embodiment]
The front view and the rear view of the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment are shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be outlined with reference to this figure. The pachinko gaming machine PM according to this embodiment is a model in which two functions equivalent to those of the conventional first-class pachinko gaming machine are mixed, and is the first game (first special symbol game) and the second game. It is possible to develop a game (second special symbol game).

<Basic configuration of pachinko gaming machines>
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PM (also simply referred to as “gaming machine PM”) is aligned with the front surface of the opening of the outer frame 1 forming the vertical fixed holding frame configured in the outer square frame size. The front frame 2 which is configured in the size of a square frame and forms an opening / closing mounting frame is attached to the front right edge so that it can be opened / closed and detached sideways by the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3 arranged on the front left edge of each other. It is always held in a closed state engaged and connected to the outer frame 1 by using a locking device 4 called a double lock provided.

A rectangular glass frame 5 matching the upper front area of the front frame 2 is attached to the front frame 2 so as to be openable / closable and detachable by using the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3, and the locking device 4 is used. It is always held in a closed state that covers the front surface of the front frame 2. The game board 20 is detachably set and held in the front frame 2, and the game area PA in front of the game board 20 is visible through the double glazing of the glass frame 5 which is always closed and held. There is.

On the front side of the glass frame 5, a frame lamp (LED lamp) 10 that emits light according to the development status of the game and a speaker 11 that generates a sound effect according to the development status of the game are provided. Upper and lower ball plates (upper ball plate 8 and lower ball plate 9) for storing game balls are provided in the lower part of the glass frame 5, and an effect of being pressed by a player in the center of the front of the upper ball plate 8 A button (effect switch) 15 is provided, and a firing handle 12 for launching a game ball is provided on the front right side of the lower ball plate 9. In the following, for convenience, the operation input means for effect is referred to as "effect button 15", but the effect button (effect switch) 15 in this example is an on / off operation type button type switch, in the direction of operation input. Cross-shaped switch (cross key, cross button) that outputs according to the response, tilt operation type lever type switch, rotation operation type dial switch, proximity that outputs when the player's hand approaches or touches It is used in concepts that include all types of operation input means such as switches, touch sensors, and touch panels.

The game board 20 is configured based on a substrate formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using a synthetic resin material such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, or an ABS resin. On the front surface of the game board 20, the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42 are fixedly fixed in an arc shape, and a substantially circular game area PA on which the game ball can roll is formed as a section. Further, the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42 form a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball to the game area PA, and the position near the exit opening of the game ball in this guide passage (inner rail 42). A ball return prevention valve 43 is provided at the tip end portion) to prevent the game ball discharged from the outlet opening into the game area PA from returning to the guide passage again. In this game area PA, along with a windmill and a large number of game nails, various types such as a first starting port 51, a second starting port 52, an operating gate 53, a large winning opening 54, and a general winning opening 61, 62, 63, 64, etc. In addition to the winning opening, the first special symbol display device 71, the second special symbol display device 72, the first special symbol hold lamp 73, the second special symbol hold lamp 74, the ordinary symbol display device 75, the normal symbol hold lamp 76, etc. Various display devices are provided. A center decoration 21 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is visibly provided through the central opening of the center decoration 21. Further, the game area PA has a left side area PA1 which is a left side area of the center decoration 21 (a board area corresponding to left-handed hitting) and a right side area of the center decoration 21 (right-handed hitting) with the center decoration 21 in the center as a reference. It is partitioned into the right side area PA2 which is the board surface area corresponding to the above. A top plate portion 22 facing the outer rail 41 in the substantially vertical direction is integrally formed on the upper portion of the center decoration 21, and is located between the top plate portion 22 and the outer rail 41 on the extension of the guide passage. A connecting passage 44 through which the game ball can pass to the right side region PA2 is formed. At the lower end of the game area PA, an out port 29 is provided to discharge the ball that has rolled and flowed down to the back side of the game board 20 without entering each winning opening. Hereinafter, each component provided on the game board 20 will be described in order.

The first starting port 51 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and includes a first starting opening switch 511 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The first starting port 51 is a constantly open type winning opening that is open upward, and a game ball (a game ball hit to the left) that mainly flows down the left side region PA1 can enter. The entry of the game ball into the first starting port 51 triggers the first special symbol lottery.

The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and includes a second starting opening switch 521 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The second starting port 51 is arranged in the right side area PA2 which is a board surface area corresponding to the right-handed hit, and a game ball (a right-handed game ball) which mainly flows down the right side area PA2 can enter. The entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 triggers the second special symbol lottery. The second starting port 52 includes an ordinary electric accessory 522 generally referred to as an electric chew, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 523 for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 522.

The ordinary electric accessory 522 is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 52 or is difficult to enter. That is, the ordinary electric accessory 522 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 unless it is displaced to the open state, and the predetermined opportunity described later (the opportunity to win the ordinary symbol lottery). When it is in the open state, the ease of entering the game ball increases. The ordinary electric accessory 522 includes a movable member 524 that slides back and forth to open and close the second starting port 52. The movable member 524 has a closed position (protruding position) in which the second starting port 52 is closed to make it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter, and the second starting port 52 is opened to allow the game ball to enter. It is possible to slide in the front-rear direction (direction orthogonal to the board surface) between the open position (retracted position) and the easy opening position (retracted position). The upper surface of the movable member 524 has a passage width of about one game ball or more in the front-rear direction, and is formed so as to incline downward from the right side to the left side in the front view. Therefore, when the movable member 524 is in the closed position (when the second starting port 52 is in the closed state), the game ball can flow down using the upper surface of the movable member 524 as a taxiway, and the game ball can flow down on the taxiway from right to left. It flows down toward you and falls from the left end of the ordinary electric accessory 522.

A special electric accessory 542 (large winning opening 54) is arranged below the ordinary electric accessory 522, and a game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 522 flows down toward the large winning opening 54. Therefore, if the large winning opening 54 is open at that time, it is easy for the game ball to enter the large winning opening 54. On the other hand, when the movable member 524 is in the open position (when the second starting port 52 is in the open state), the game ball flowing down the right side region PA2 can easily enter the second starting port 52. There is. In this example, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 has a board surface design (gauge design) that flows toward the second starting port 52 (ordinary electric accessory 522) with a high probability (almost 100%). 2 When the starting port 52 is in the closed state, the game ball is guided to the upper surface of the movable member 524 and flows down toward the large winning opening 54, while when the second starting port 52 is in the open state, the game ball is It is configured so that the ball does not enter the second starting opening 52 and reach the large winning opening 54.

The actuating gate 53 is provided as a start winning opening corresponding to a normal symbol game, and includes an actuating gate switch 531 for detecting the passage of a game ball. The passage of the game ball through the operating gate 53 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting port 52.

The large winning opening 54 is formed as a winning opening having a horizontally rectangular shape that is opened when the winning / failing lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. The large prize opening 54 is a large winning opening switch 541 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a special electric accessory 542 generally called an attacker, and a large prize for opening and closing the special electric accessory 542. It is equipped with a mouth solenoid 543. The special electric accessory 542 is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 54 or is difficult to enter. In this example, the large winning opening 54 is provided in the right side area PA2 in the game area PA. Therefore, in the special game (big hit game, small hit game), when the game ball is launched, the ball is easily hit into the big winning opening 54 by hitting the right area PA2, that is, the so-called right hit. It has become.

The general winning openings 61 to 63 are arranged in the left side region PA1 which is a board surface region corresponding to left-handed hitting, and a game ball flowing down the left side region PA1 can enter. The general winning openings 61 to 63 include a general winning opening switch 611 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The general winning opening switch 611 is configured as a common sensor (single sensor) for the three general winning openings 61 to 63 from the viewpoint of cost reduction and the like, and the game ball can be inserted into any of the general winning openings 61 to 63. Spheres can also be detected. In addition, the entry of the game ball into each general winning opening 61-63 does not trigger the lottery of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol, but the trigger for winning the winning ball like the other winning openings (excluding the operating gate 53). It becomes.

Among the above-mentioned various winning openings, the first starting opening 51 and the operating gate 53 are when the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol indicating a big hit (the condition device described later). (When activated), the combined operation gates 91 and 92, which trigger the execution of the big hit game, are also used. The first starting port 51 also serves as a first combination operating gate 91 in which a game ball flowing down the left side area PA can enter, and a first combination operation gate switch 911 for detecting the entry of the game ball. I have. The actuating gate 53 also serves as a second combination actuating gate 92 through which a game ball flowing down the right region PA2 can pass, and includes a second combination actuating gate switch 921 for detecting the passage of the game ball. In the following, the terms "entry" and "passing" of the game ball to 91 and 92 to each combination operating gate are interpreted synonymously, and the term "passing" is mainly used.

In the present embodiment, when the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed by the stop symbol (big hit symbol) indicating the jackpot, the game ball is the first winning combination operating gate 91 or the second winning combination. The jackpot game is started on condition that the player passes through the actuating gate 92. After that, after the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed by the stop symbol (big hit symbol) indicating the big hit, the game ball is operated by the first combination operation gate 91 or the second combination operation. The period until the ball passes through the gate 92 (until the big hit game is started) is also referred to as a "waiting state for the big hit game". Therefore, even if the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed as the jackpot symbol, the jackpot game is not started unless the game ball passes through any of the winning combination operating gates 91 and 92 ( The waiting state for the jackpot game continues). Here, the time from when the game ball passes through the winning combination operation gates 91 and 92 after the stop display of the big hit symbol to the start of the first round of the big hit game (that is, the big hit start demo time) is the big hit. It may be different depending on the game state when the symbol is stopped and displayed. In particular, a relatively short time (eg: 1 second) when a big hit is made in a latent probability changing gaming state (or a probabilistic gaming state or a time-saving gaming state), which will be described later, and a relatively long time (eg) when a big hit is made in a normal gaming state. : 10 seconds). The reason is that when a big hit is made in the latent probability change game state (or the probability change game state or the time-saving game state), the consecutive villa speed (the continuous generation speed of the big hit) is increased. On the contrary, when you want to slow down the continuous villa speed, if you make a big hit in the latent probability change game state (or the probability change game state or the time saving game state), it takes a relatively long time (example: 10 seconds), and if you make a big hit in the normal game state. May be a relatively short time (eg: 1 second). On the other hand, for the small hit game, it is not necessary for the game ball to pass through the winning combination operation gates 91 and 92, and the small hit game is actively started (only when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed). It is possible. From the viewpoint of cost reduction and space saving, a configuration may be adopted in which the combined operation gate switches 911 and 921 are shared with the first start port switch 511 and the operation gate switch 531, respectively. Further, the combined operation gates 91 and 92 may not be shared with the first starting port 51 and the operating gate 53, and may be provided as a configuration separate and independent from the first starting port 51 and the operating gate 53. When the combined operation gates 91 and 92 are configured separately from the first starting port 51 and the operating gate 53, the left combined operation gate 91 is arranged in the vicinity of the upstream side of the first starting port 51. At the same time, the right-hand combination operating gate 92 is arranged near the upstream side of the operating gate 53 or the large winning opening 54, and the game ball flowing down toward the first starting opening 51 has a high frequency (100% probability may be used). ), The game ball that passes through the left winning combination operating gate 91 and flows down toward the operating gate 53 or the large winning opening 54 frequently (may be 100% probability) passes through the right winning combination operating gate 92. It may be adopted. Further, when the first combination operating gate 91 is composed of a member different from the first starting port 51, it may be arranged so as to be directly below the first starting port 51 or to be connected to the left and right or the upper and lower sides of the first starting port 51. Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, a configuration in which only the first combination operating gate 91 is arranged (a configuration in which the second combination operation gate 92 is not arranged) or a configuration in which only the second combination operation gate 92 is arranged (first). A configuration in which the one-role continuous operation gate 91 is not arranged) may be adopted.

The first special symbol display device 71 performs variable display and definite display of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting port 51. The first special symbol display device 71 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variation display of the first special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp is stopped and switched to the lighting display. The first special symbol is confirmed and displayed with.

The second special symbol display device 72 performs variable display and definite display of the second special symbol when the game ball enters the second starting port 52. The second special symbol display device 72 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variation display of the second special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp is stopped and switched to the lighting display. The second special symbol is confirmed and displayed with.

The first special figure holding lamp 73 and the second special figure holding lamp 74 are composed of, for example, two LED lamps, respectively, and the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is increased by the lighting / blinking display of the lamps. Express (up to 4 each). The number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is the number related to the random number value acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 51 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the jackpot game. There is, and the acquired random number value is suspended, that is, the number in which the pass / fail judgment is temporarily suspended until the pass / fail judgment permission condition (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random value is shown. Similarly, the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is a random value acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 52 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the jackpot game. This is the number to which the acquired random value is suspended, that is, the number for which the pass / fail judgment is temporarily suspended until the pass / fail judgment permission condition (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random value. There is.

The ordinary symbol display device 75 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and performs variable display and definite display of the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol hold lamp 76 is composed of, for example, four lamps, and the number of lamps lit corresponds to the number of hold of normal symbol changes (the number of normal symbol changes that have not yet been executed). A round display 77 is provided on the left side of the normal symbol display device 75 to display the number of round games (unit games) in the big hit game (number of rounds: number of times the special electric accessory 542 is continuously operated). ing.

The effect display device 70 mainly includes a variable effect of a decorative symbol that is variablely displayed / stopped in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a notice effect that suggests or informs the expectation of a big hit in advance. In addition to displaying the image, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed on hold. Specifically, on the screen of the effect display device 70, a decorative symbol display unit 700 for executing variable display of decorative symbols, a notice effect display, and the like, a first special figure hold lamp 73, and a second special figure hold lamp 74. A hold image display unit 710 is provided in which the hold display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in synchronization with the above. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the effect display device 70. The decorative symbol display unit 700 is provided with three rows of display areas (left display area Z1, middle display area Z2, right display area Z3) which are variable display areas of decorative symbols on a predetermined effective line (not shown). The left symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the left display area Z1, the middle symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the middle display area Z2, and the right symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the right display area Z3 are stopped and displayed. It has become so. In the normal display mode, the hold image display unit 710 displays the hold image (hold icon) of the predetermined mode when the operation hold ball of the special symbol is generated, while the hold image display unit 710 corresponds to the digestion of the action hold ball. The pending image is lost. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the order in which the special symbol operation reserved balls are generated (ball entry order), and a maximum of 8 images (4 reserved images of the 1st special symbol and 4 reserved images of the 2nd special symbol) are displayed. Can be displayed.

The center decoration 21 is installed around the effect display device 70, and has functions such as a flow path for a game ball, protection of an effect screen, and decoration. The center decoration 21 is provided with a movable accessory 24 that executes an effect operation according to the development status of the game. The movable accessory 24 is configured to include a motor M (for example, a stepping motor) as a drive source. Further, the game board 20 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) 25 that emits light according to the development status of the game. In the following description, for convenience, the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 25 are also collectively referred to as “directing lamp LP”.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 2, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described. On the back side of the front frame 2, there are upper and lower back set boards 30 based on a base frame body formed in a rectangular frame shape that is slightly smaller than the front frame 2 and has a window that communicates back and forth in the center. It is connected to the rear of the front frame 2 via a hinge mechanism 3 so that it can be opened and closed laterally and can be attached and detached. A rectangular box-shaped back set cover 30C with an open front is detachably attached to the back set board 30, and is always arranged so as to cover the back side of the game board 20 attached to the front frame 2. (Thus, the main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the image control board 300, which will be described later, are covered with the back set cover 30C).

Each part of the back set board 30 is connected to a storage tank 31 for storing a large number of game balls, a tank rail 32 extending from the storage tank 31 to the right with a gentle downward slope, and a lower end connected to the right end of the tank rail 32. A prize for guiding the game ball paid out from the ball supply passage portion 33, the prize ball payout unit 34 for paying out the game ball guided by the ball supply passage portion 33, and the prize ball payout unit 34 to the upper ball plate 6. A ball passage portion 35 and the like are provided.

On the back side of the game board 10, a main control board 100 that comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM, a production control board 200 that controls the overall production, image display according to the game development, and sound effect control. An image control board 300, etc. for performing the above are attached. On the other hand, on the back side of the back set board 30, a payout control board 400 that controls the launch and payout of the game ball, and power is received from the game facility side to supply power to various control boards and electric / electronic parts. An external information terminal board 600 (see FIG. 3) that outputs an external information signal (outer end signal) is attached to the outside of the power supply board 500 and the gaming machine PM. In order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are housed in a transparent resin board case having a caulking structure and a sealing seal structure at predetermined positions on the back of the game board 20 or the back of the back set board 30. Arranged. These control boards and the electrical and electronic components of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PM are connected to each other via a harness (connector cable) so that the pachinko gaming machine PM can be operated.

<Control configuration of pachinko gaming machine>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3 additionally, each control board mounted on the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing a control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM.

The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processes related to the game, a ROM 102 that stores control programs and various data, a RAM 103 that functions as a work area and a buffer memory that serves as a temporary storage area, and peripheral boards and each. It is equipped with a main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 110 configured to include an I / O port circuit 104 that inputs and outputs signals to and from the device, and the main CPU 101 plays games according to a control program stored in the ROM 102. It is configured to perform the main control over the progress. In addition, although not shown, the main control board 100 has a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and resets the main CPU 101 when it malfunctions or goes out of control. It operates as a separate system from the WDT circuit that returns to the normal state, the CTC circuit that enables real-time oscillator generation and time measurement, and the program processing (software random number) by the main CPU 101, and generates a predetermined random number (built-in random number). A random number generation circuit and the like are installed, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

The main CPU 101 reads various control programs stored in the ROM 102 and performs arithmetic processing based on the detection information from each switch, thereby executing various processes related to the main control of the game. The RAM 103 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source generated in the power supply board 500. The backup area of the RAM 103 is an area for storing data such as the stack pointer and each register held when the power is turned off when the power is turned off, and is used when the power is turned on (when the power is turned off and restored). ), The state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area.

Further, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to the first start port switch 511, the second start port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531 and the large winning port switch 541, the general winning port switch 611, the combined operation gate switch 911, 921, and the like. The detection signals from various switches are input to the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. Further, the main control board 100 includes a first special symbol display device 71, a second special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol hold lamp 73, a second special symbol hold lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75, and a normal symbol hold lamp. In addition to being electrically connected to the 76, it is electrically connected to the normal electric accessory solenoid 523 and the special electric accessory solenoid 543, and various control signals from the main CPU 101 are transmitted via the I / O port circuit 104. It is transmitted to the display means and various solenoids. Further, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to the external information terminal board 600, and transmits a game information signal from the main CPU 101 to the external terminal board 600 via the I / O port 104. The external information terminal board 600 transmits various external information signals to an external device (data display, hall computer, etc.) installed outside the gaming machine PM based on the gaming information signal transmitted from the main control board 100. Send. The game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100 may be input to the external information terminal board 600 via, for example, the payout control board 300.

The main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 are connected by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe line, and communicate only in one direction from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. It is possible to connect, and various effect control commands are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. Data cannot be transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the main control board 100, and data transmission cannot be requested to the main control board 100.

The effect control board 200 includes a sub-main CPU 201 that performs various arithmetic processes related to the game effect based on the effect control command from the main control board 100, a ROM 202 that stores the effect control program and various data, a work area that serves as a temporary storage area, and the like. It is equipped with a production control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 210 configured to include a RAM 203 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 204 that inputs and outputs signals to and from peripheral boards and devices. The sub-main CPU 201 is configured to execute the main control related to the game effect according to the control program stored in the ROM 202. In addition, although not shown, the effect control board 200 is reset when the sub-main CPU 201, which is a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, malfunctions or goes out of control. WDT circuit that returns to the normal state, TPU circuit that outputs various signals based on the system clock, interrupt controller that activates various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on signals from the TPU circuit, and for input / output of serial data It is equipped with serial communication circuits, etc., which are connected to each other via an internal bus.

The effect control board 200 is an image control command for instructing an image and sound to the image control board 300 in an effect control process based on an effect control command from the main control board 100, and a lamp control signal for controlling the lamp connection board 91. (Ramp data), a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92, and the like are generated. The effect control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and an image control command related to image and sound is transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300, and as a response thereof, the effect control board 200 is transmitted. A response command (ACK command) indicating that the image control command has been normally received is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the effect control board 200.

Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board 91 on which a plurality of LED drivers are mounted, and a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 is transmitted via a serial communication circuit. Send. In this example, the effect control board 200 and the lamp connection board 91 adopt clock-synchronous serial communication, and are transmitted by a signal line (clock line) different from the data line for lamp data transmission. The lamp control signal is transmitted bit by bit via the data line in synchronization with the clock signal. The lamp connection board 91 has a built-in LED driver that functions by receiving a lamp control signal for driving an LED transmitted from the effect control board 200, and switches the switch in the circuit on / off based on the lamp control signal. Therefore, the drive current is supplied or cut off to the effect lamp LP, and the effect lamp LP is controlled to be turned on or off.

Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a plurality of motor drivers 92, and a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92 is transmitted to the motor driver 92 via the I / O port circuit 204. Send. The motor driver 92 supplies a drive current to the stepping motor of each movable accessory 24 by switching the switch in the circuit on / off based on the drive control signal for driving the accessory transmitted from the effect control board 200. Alternatively, it is shut off to control the operation of each movable accessory 24. A parallel communication method is adopted for data transmission to the motor driver 92.

The image control board 300 includes a sub-sub CPU 301 that performs various arithmetic processes related to image production based on an image control command from the effect control board 200, a ROM 302 that stores an image control program, various data, and the like, and a work area that serves as a temporary storage area. It is equipped with an image control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 310 configured to include a RAM 303 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 304 that inputs and outputs signals to and from peripheral boards and devices. , The sub-sub CPU 301 is configured to execute the main control related to the image effect according to the control program stored in the ROM 302. In addition, although not shown, the image control board 300 has a VDP that generates image data according to the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301, and the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301. It is equipped with a sound source IC that generates acoustic data. The VDP is a so-called image processor, and reads image data stored in an image ROM in response to an instruction from a sub-sub CPU 301, and transmits the video signal (image data) generated by image processing to the effect display device. A high-speed VRAM used for developing and processing image data read from an image ROM is connected to this VDP. The sound source IC reads the acoustic data stored in the voice ROM in response to the instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and outputs the acoustic data generated by the synthesis processing to the speaker 11 via the amplifier (digital amplifier).

The payout control board 400 is mainly composed of a payout CPU 401, a ROM 402, and a RAM 403. The payout control board 400 is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be bidirectionally communicable, and controls for driving the prize ball payout unit 34 to pay out the prize balls based on the payout control command from the main control board 100. Is executed, and the ball feeding mechanism 13 and the launching mechanism 14 are synchronously driven based on the operation amount of the launching handle 12 to control the launching of the game ball.

Although not shown in detail, the power supply board 500 has a normal power supply circuit for generating a normal power supply used in each control board and a backup power supply based on the primary power supply supplied from the power supply equipment of the game island. It is configured with a backup power supply circuit for generating power and a power supply cutoff monitoring circuit for monitoring power supply cutoff due to a voltage drop, and is a power supply required for electronic and electrical parts such as each control board and gaming equipment. Supply. A power switch for activating the power circuit is connected to the power supply board 500, and it is assumed that the primary power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island, and when the power switch is turned on, the power supply board A predetermined power supply is supplied to each control board or the like from the normal power supply circuit of 500. The power supply board 500 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device of the game island is cut off, and when the power supply cutoff is detected, the power supply cutoff signal (NMI signal) for notifying that fact is sent to the main control board 100. , Transmission to the effect control board 200 and the payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit is charged when power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island to the pachinko gaming machine PM. Further, a RAM clear switch (not shown) for temporarily erasing the temporary storage contents of the RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and setting an initial value is connected to the power supply board 500 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on. ing. The RAM clear switch may be connected to, for example, the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 500.

<Basic operation of pachinko gaming machines>
In the pachinko gaming machine PM configured as described above, the outer frame 1 is fixedly installed on the game island of the game facility, the front frame 2, the glass frame 5, etc. are closed and locked, and the pachinko machine PM is used for the game. The game is started by storing the game ball in the plate 8 and rotating the firing handle 12. When the launch handle 12 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball plate 8 are sent out to the launch mechanism 14 one by one by the ball feed mechanism 13 arranged on the back side of the glass frame 5. It is launched into the game area PA by the launch mechanism 14. At this time, when the firing handle 12 is operated with less than a predetermined amount, the game ball does not reach the right side region PA2 and flows down the left side region PA1. In this left side region PA1, a left side flow path for allowing the game ball to flow down toward the first starting port 51 and the general winning openings 61 to 63 is formed. On the other hand, when the firing handle 12 is operated by a predetermined amount or more, the game ball reaches the right side region PA2 and flows down the right side region PA2. In the right side region PA2, a right side flow path for allowing the game ball to flow down toward the second starting port 52, the operating gate 53, and the large winning opening 54 is formed. The game ball flowing down the left side region PA1 or the right side region PA2 in this way has a first starting port 51, a second starting port 52, and an operating gate 53 according to the routes distributed in the left side region PA1 or the right side region PA1. , The ball can be entered in any of the large winning openings 54 and the general winning openings 61 to 63, but if the ball is not entered in any of the winning openings, the ball is flowed down to the out opening 29.

When a game ball flowing down the game area PA enters any of the first starting port 51, the second starting opening 52, the large winning opening 54, and the general winning opening 61-63, a prize corresponding to the type of the winning opening is awarded. The ball is paid out to the upper ball plate 8 or the lower ball plate 9 by the prize ball payout unit 34. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) to be paid out when one game ball enters each winning opening is "4" for the first starting opening 51 and "4" for the second starting opening 52. "1 piece", "3 pieces" are set for the general winning openings 61 to 64, and "10 pieces" are set for the large winning opening 54. The number of unit prize balls is not limited to that illustrated in the present embodiment, and other unit prize balls may be applied. For example, the number of unit prize balls may be "4" for the first starting opening 51, "3" for the second starting opening 52, "5" for the general winning openings 61 to 64, and the like.

When the game ball enters the first starting port 51 or the second starting port 52, a lottery random number value of the special symbol is acquired, and the random number value is temporarily stored as an operation holding ball of the special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number. Then, when a predetermined start condition (a change start condition of a special symbol described later) is satisfied, a hit / fail determination, a symbol determination, and a variation pattern determination of the special symbol are performed on the lottery random number value related to the earliest operation holding ball. In the mode corresponding to this determination result, the special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72, and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display device 70. The variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is synchronously stopped and displayed after the lapse of the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed in a stop mode indicating a big hit, the game shifts to a special game (big hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In each round game (unit game) of this big hit game, an opening / closing operation is performed in which the big winning opening 54 is changed to the open state only once or a plurality of times. When a specified number of game balls enter the large winning opening 54, or when the opening time of the large winning opening 54 reaches the opening time limit, the round game being executed ends. Here, the stop mode of the decorative symbol indicating the big hit is, for example, an embodiment in which three types of symbols match. In the present embodiment, when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are confirmed and displayed in the stop mode indicating the jackpot, a plurality of round games (unit games) are executed as the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, if a predetermined jackpot is won, the probability variation function of the special symbol may be activated from the end of the jackpot game until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the predetermined final number of times. When the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery shifts from the normal low probability state to the high probability state, so that a new jackpot (big hit game) will occur relatively early. Become. The probability fluctuation function of the special symbol may be continued until the next big hit occurs. Further, as the predetermined final number of times, "10000 times" may be set, which substantially corresponds to the number of fluctuation display times until the next big hit occurs.

In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol may be activated in association with or independently of the probability variation function of the special symbol. When the special symbol variation time reduction function is activated, the average variation time of special symbols and decorative symbols tends to be shorter than usual, and the number of special symbol lottery per unit time is improved (big hit per unit time). Ease of acquisition can be increased).

Further, after the jackpot game is completed, the electric chew support function may be activated in association with or independently of the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The electric chew support function enhances the ease of entering the second starting port 52 by operating the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol, and the opening extension function of the normal electric accessory 522. It is a state (also referred to as a "easy-to-enter state"). When the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is activated, the winning probability of the normal symbol becomes higher than that in the normal state. When the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is activated, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened. When the opening time extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is activated, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is extended from the normal state. In this easy-to-enter state, there is a high possibility that the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol per fixed time will increase more than usual, and the ease of entering the second starting port 52 will also increase. It also increases the possibility that the number of balls entered will increase. Therefore, by activating the electric chew support function, the chances of obtaining a prize ball by entering the second starting port 52 increase during that period, and as a result, it is possible to continue the game with almost no reduction in the number of balls held. Become. That is, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls of the game ball, becomes high. Hereinafter, the state in which the electric chew support function is operating is also referred to as a “high base state”, and the state in which the electric chew support function is not operating is also referred to as a “low base state”.

On the other hand, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed in the stop mode indicating the small hit, the game shifts to the small hit game having a lower profit degree than the above-mentioned big hit game. In this small hit game, an opening / closing operation is performed in which the large winning opening 54 is changed to the open state only once or a plurality of times. When a predetermined number of game balls enter the large winning opening 54 or when the opening time of the large winning opening 54 reaches the opening time limit, the small hit game ends.

<Main functional configuration of pachinko gaming machines>
Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine PM (mainly the main control board 100 / effect control board 200) according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the functional block diagram of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 includes a ball entry determination means 110, a game lottery random number generation means 120, a hold control means 130, a preliminary determination means 135, a special symbol lottery processing means 140, and a normal symbol lottery processing means 145. It includes a special game control means 150, a symbol display control means 155, an electric accessory control means 160, a game state control means 165, an error monitoring control means 170, a main information storage means 180, and a command transmission / reception means 190. Each of the above-mentioned means on the main control board 100 is composed of hardware such as a main CPU 101, ROM 102, RAM 103, and an electronic circuit provided on the main control board 100, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 102 and the like. It is a functional expression of something.

The ball entry determination means 110 is detected from the first start port switch 511, the second start port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the large winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switch 611, the combined operation gate switch 911, 921, and the like. Based on the signal, it is determined that the game ball enters each winning opening. When the ball entry determination means 110 detects the entry of a game ball by the first start port switch 511, the ball entry determination means 110 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “first start port winning command”) to that effect, and the first 2 When the entry of the game ball is detected by the start opening switch 521, an effect control command (referred to as “the second start opening winning command”) indicating that effect is generated, and the operation gate switch 531 is used to generate the game ball. When the passage is detected, an effect control command (referred to as "operation gate winning command") is generated to indicate that fact, and when the large winning opening switch 541 detects the entry of a game ball, it indicates that fact. When a production control command (referred to as a "large winning opening winning command") is generated and a game ball entry is detected by the general winning opening switch 611, an effect control command ("general winning opening winning command") indicating that fact is detected. ”), And when the passage of the game ball is detected by the combination operation gate switch 911, 921, an effect control command (referred to as“ combination operation gate winning command ”) is generated to that effect. Then, this is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The game lottery random number generation means 120 is used for a winning / failing lottery of a special symbol by taking in a built-in random number generated by the random number generation circuit of the main control microcomputer 110 by software and adding a soft random number per special symbol described later to the built-in random number. Generate a random number per special symbol. Further, the game lottery random number generation means 120 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by the program processing of the main CPU 101. These random number counters play a role as a random number generation means for generating random numbers by software. As this software random number, the initial value for performing a new update after the update of one cycle of the special symbol per soft random number added to the above-mentioned built-in random number for the hit random number generation and the special symbol per soft random number is completed. Soft initial value random number per special symbol for determining, special symbol stop symbol random number used for determining the hit symbol (combination of symbols that activates the condition device) as the stop symbol of the special symbol, special symbol stop symbol random number Special symbol stop symbol initial value random number for determining the initial value for new update after one cycle of update is completed, special symbol fluctuation pattern random number for selection of special symbol variation pattern, Random number per normal symbol to be used for winning / failing lottery of normal symbol, initial value random number per normal symbol to determine the initial value for new update after one cycle update of random number per normal symbol is completed, Ordinary symbol variation pattern Random numbers for use in selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol are included. These software random numbers are updated once each time a timer interrupt process occurs (increment, decrement, addition of prime numbers, etc.), and the initial value random number is not executed while the timer interrupt process is not executed (increment, decrement, addition of prime numbers, etc.). (During loop processing) is also updated using the remaining time of the interrupt cycle.

The hold control means 130 includes a special symbol hold control means 131 and a normal symbol hold control means 132.

The special symbol hold control means 131 is a lottery random value related to the special symbol game, which is a random value per special symbol, per special symbol, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 51 or the second start port 52. The symbol random value and the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value are acquired, and the random value is managed as the operation pending ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol holding control means 131 is a main information storage means in which the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is combined with the entry order of the holding balls up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces). Temporarily stored in the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area of 180.

In the first special symbol hold storage area and the second special symbol hold storage area, the hold 1 storage area (first hold storage area) and the hold 2 storage area (2) are in the order of entry into the starting ports 51 and 52. A hold storage area), a hold 3 storage area (third hold storage area), and a hold 4 storage area (fourth hold storage area) are provided. Each hold storage area can store a random number per special symbol, a random number per special symbol, and a random number of special symbol variation patterns as a set of operation hold ball information. The operation hold ball information is stored in the order of hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage area, while hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage. It is digested in the order of areas (principle of first-in first-out). Further, when the reserved ball information in the reserved 1 storage area is digested, the reserved ball information stored in the reserved 2 storage area, the reserved 3 storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area is shifted to the lower numbered storage area, respectively. Hold 4 Clears the contents of the storage area to zero.

Further, the special symbol holding control means 131 has a first special symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operating holding balls of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operating holding balls of the second special symbol. It has a special symbol reserved ball count counter. The special symbol hold control means 131 increments the corresponding counter by 1 each time it acquires one special symbol operation hold ball as an update process of the number of operation hold balls of the special symbol, and one operation hold ball is digested. The corresponding counter is subtracted by 1 for each.

Further, when the special symbol hold control means 131 updates (adds or subtracts) the number of operation hold balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect control command including the update information of the hold ball number (“symbol memory”). A number command) is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This one command includes information on both the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol.

When the change start condition of the first special symbol described later is satisfied, the special symbol holding control means 131 digests the operation holding ball (the earliest operating holding ball) of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol described later. When the fluctuation start condition of is satisfied, the operation holding ball (the earliest operation holding ball) of the second special symbol is digested. In the present embodiment, the determination of the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol and the determination of the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol are executed separately and independently, so that the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 71 is executed. The variation display of the second special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 72 are performed in parallel. That is, by separately and independently digesting the operation-reserved sphere of the first special symbol and the operation-reserved sphere of the second special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to the corresponding win / loss lottery and variable display. We have adopted a so-called parallel model that performs such things in parallel. Therefore, even if the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed for a long time, the variable display of the other special symbol is performed in parallel with the variable display of the one special symbol. Therefore, the variable display of one special symbol is not delayed during the execution of the variable display of the other special symbol.

The normal symbol hold control means 132 is a lottery random value related to the normal symbol game, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the operating gate 53, which is a random value per normal symbol, a symbol random value per normal symbol, and a normal symbol variation pattern. A random number value is acquired, and the random number value is managed as operation holding ball information of a normal symbol. The normal symbol hold control means 132 stores the operation hold ball information of the normal symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) in the normal symbol hold storage area of the main information storage means 180 in a form combined with the entry order of the hold balls. Temporarily memorize. Further, the normal symbol holding control means 132 has a normal symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operating holding balls of the normal symbol. The normal symbol hold control means 132 adds 1 to the corresponding counter for each acquisition of one normal symbol hold ball as an update process of the number of hold balls of the normal symbol, and one action hold ball is consumed. The corresponding counter is subtracted by 1 for each.

When the operation hold ball of the special symbol is acquired at the predetermined advance determination timing, the advance determination means 135 executes the advance determination for the pre-reading notice for the operation hold ball. As an example of the above-mentioned pre-judgment timing, when (1) waiting for a hit and when the operation holding ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is not operating, (2) waiting for a hit and Either when the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is operating, or when the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is acquired during the big hit or the small hit. It is time to meet the conditions. The above-mentioned pre-judgment timing is an example, and the pre-judgment timing is changed according to the specifications of the gaming machine (for example, it has a start port related to the second special symbol having no ordinary electric accessory, and eight pieces are reserved at normal times. In the model in which the above (1) is stored, the above (1) may be applied not only to the first special symbol but also to the second special symbol, etc.), or a specification may be adopted in which the pre-judgment is performed at any time without setting the pre-judgment timing. Further, in each game state, only the operation-holding ball of the special symbol that is the subject of the game may be the target of the preliminary determination. For example, in the normal game state, only the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol is the target of the preliminary determination. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, the latent probability change game state, and the probability change game state, it is preferable that only the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is the target of the preliminary determination. Specifically, the pre-determination means 135 reads the random number value corresponding to the operation hold ball acquired this time from the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area of the main information storage means 180, and determines whether or not the result is correct. Pre-judgment (pre-judgment of hit / fail), pre-judgment of symbol (pre-judgment of symbol), and pre-judgment of fluctuation pattern (pre-judgment of fluctuation pattern) are sequentially executed. Although the pre-judgment table used in each pre-judgment is not shown, the area corresponding to the total number of random numbers in each of the pass / fail pre-judgment table, the symbol pre-judgment table, and the variation pattern pre-judgment table is divided into a plurality of areas. A lottery ID (a number indicating the result of the pre-judgment (also referred to as a "pre-judgment number")) is assigned to each of these areas (determination number). Therefore, the result of this preliminary determination is based on the result of the main lottery by the special symbol lottery processing means 140 described later (result of winning / failing determination, result of symbol determination, result of variation pattern determination). The winning / failing pre-determination table, the symbol pre-determining table, and the like may be the same as the winning / failing lottery table and the symbol lottery table used for the lottery when the fluctuation is actually started. Here, the fluctuation pattern pre-determination table may change the game status at the start of fluctuation (whether or not there is a probability change, whether or not there is a time reduction, whether or not it is during a limited frequency period that refers to a special table, the number of reserved balls, etc.). Therefore, as described above, it is desirable to determine which of the plurality of regions is included. Further, as a modification, it is configured to predetermine a random value such as a register on the main CPU 101 that is temporarily stored before being stored in the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area. You may. Then, the pre-determination means 135 sequentially generates an effect control command (referred to as a "pre-determination command") including information on the result of the pre-determination (pre-determination number), and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Store in.

The special symbol lottery processing means 140 includes a special symbol winning / failing determination unit 141, a special symbol stop symbol determination unit 412, and a special symbol variation pattern determination unit 143. When the change start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol lottery processing means 140 is stored in the earliest storage area (reserved 1 storage area) of the special symbol reservation storage area in the main information storage means 180. The numerical value, the symbol random value per special symbol, and the special symbol variation pattern random value are read out and stored in the special symbol hit / miss determination area, the special symbol symbol determination area, and the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, respectively. Here, the "conditions for starting fluctuation of the first special symbol" are (A1) not during a big hit or a small hit, (A2) the first special symbol is waiting for fluctuation, and (A3) the first special. There is an actuation hold ball of the symbol. When all of these conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the first special symbol is in a state in which the fluctuation start is possible (a state in which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied). On the other hand, the "conditions for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol" are (B1) not during a big hit or a small hit, (B2) the second special symbol is waiting for fluctuation, and (B3) the second special symbol. There is an operation hold ball of. When all of these conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the second special symbol is in a state in which the fluctuation start is possible (a state in which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied).

The special symbol winning / failing determination means 141 reads a random number value per special symbol from the special symbol winning / failing determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes a winning / failing determination, and the determination result corresponds to any of big hit, small hit, and miss. Decide if you want to. The result of this hit / fail determination is temporarily stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 (for example, big hit data "55H", small hit data "33H", miss data "00H"), and is used in the subsequent processing. After that, it is cleared when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. The special symbol winning / failing determination means 141 holds a special symbol winning / failing lottery table referred to at the time of this winning / failing determination.

Here, FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a special symbol winning / failing lottery table. In the figure, (A) is referred to in a gaming state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated, and (B) is a gaming state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated. ). In this special symbol winning / failing lottery table, the random number range of the random number value per special symbol and the result of the winning / failing determination (big hit, small hit, miss) are associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 5, in the game state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated in the hit / fail determination of the special symbol, the random number value per special symbol is in the range of "0 to 204". If it corresponds to, it becomes a big hit, and if it is a game state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, it is a big hit when the random number value per special symbol falls in the range of "0 to 818". Will be. That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the winning probability of the big hit changes from the low probability "1/320" to the high probability "1/80". In this way, the jackpot winning probability changes according to the gaming state, but the jackpot winning probability is designed to be equal between the winning / failing determination of the first special symbol and the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol. Here, even if the result of the winning / failing determination does not correspond to the big hit, in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol, the small hit is won with a relatively high probability of "1 / 1.1". The winning probability of a small hit is designed to have the same winning probability regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state). In the present embodiment, a small hit is set only for the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol, but for example, a small hit is also set for the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol, which is higher than the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol. 2 The winning / failing judgment of the special symbol may be configured to win a small hit with a higher probability.

<Big hit no lottery process>
Here, a jackpot non-lottery process will be described as a pass / fail determination process for the special symbol. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram for explaining the jackpot non-lottery process in the present embodiment. In the figure (A), when the first special symbol is in the variable display of big hit or miss, the result that can be derived as the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "○", and the result that cannot be derived is "○". It is displayed with "x". In the figure (B), when the second special symbol is displaying the fluctuation of the big hit, the small hit, or the miss, the result that can be derived as the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "○", and it cannot be derived. The result is displayed as "x".

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, the result of the hit / fail determination of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, and the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (during the variable display of the big hit). ), When the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol is executed, it is prohibited to derive the big hit as a result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol, and only the small hit or the miss is derived. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol corresponds to the big hit, the result of the hit / miss judgment is forcibly replaced with the big hit. That is, in the above special symbol winning / failing lottery table, when the game state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated, the random number value per special symbol corresponds to the range of "0 to 204". In this case, the result of the hit / fail judgment is forcibly out of order (replaced from the big hit to out of order), and when the game state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the special symbol hit disorder When the numerical value corresponds to the range of "0 to 818", the result of the applicability determination is forcibly out of order (replaced from the big hit to out of order). As a modification of the above, in addition to the above-mentioned special symbol winning / failing lottery table, a table for big hit no lottery that does not include the jackpot judgment value (random number range) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the special symbol is prepared. During the variable display of the big hit of the special symbol, the small hit lottery is performed in which the result of the winning / failing judgment is only a small hit or a miss by referring to the table dedicated to the big hit non-lottery process instead of the above special symbol winning / failing lottery table. The method may be adopted. In this modification, if the specifications are such that a small hit is not set as a result of the hit / fail judgment, a method of immediately determining the hit / miss may be adopted without performing the hit / fail judgment.

The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the result of the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol stop symbol determining means 142 has a first special symbol jackpot symbol table and a second special symbol that are referred to when determining a jackpot symbol (big hit type) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It has a special symbol jackpot symbol table. In the present embodiment, the "specific jackpot" means a jackpot (probability variation jackpot) that triggers the activation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends, and the "normal jackpot" means the probability fluctuation after the jackpot game ends. It means a big hit (non-probable variable big hit) that does not trigger the activation of the function.

FIG. 7A is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, the symbol group, the jackpot type, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 of each round are set for the symbol random value per special symbol. They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol jackpot table, four types of jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, it is divided into 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A), 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D). In the 10R specific big hit (symbol group A), the specified number of rounds of the big hit game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D) have 4 rounds specified for the jackpot game, and a big prize in one round game. The opening time (maximum opening time) of the mouth 54 is 28 seconds.

FIG. 7B is a diagram schematically showing the second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, for the special symbol per symbol random value, the symbol group, the jackpot type, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 of each round are displayed. They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot table, five types of jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, 10R specific jackpot (symbol group E), 6R specific jackpot (symbol group F), 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H), and 2R normal jackpot. It is sorted into (symbol group I). In the 10R specific big hit (symbol group E), the specified number of rounds of the big hit game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. In the 6R specific big hit (symbol group F), the specified number of rounds of the big hit game is 6 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. The 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G) and the 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H) have four rounds specified for the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game. ) Is 28 seconds. In the 2R normal jackpot (symbol group I), the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 2 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 2 seconds.

Of the various jackpot types, each jackpot except for the 2R normal jackpot is an opportunity to execute a long-open round game in which the jackpot 54 opens for a long time (28 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. On the other hand, the 2R normal jackpot is a jackpot that triggers a short-open round game in which the jackpot 54 opens for a short time (2 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, in the long-opening round game, the opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set so that a specified number (full count: 10 balls) of game balls can be entered into the large winning opening 54 or easily entered. It is a game. The short-open round game is a round game in which the opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set so that a predetermined number (full count: 10 balls) of game balls cannot be entered or is difficult to enter in the large winning opening 54.

Although not shown, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a small hit, one small hit symbol (symbol group) is selected from a plurality of types of small hit symbols (symbol group), and the first one is selected. 2 At the end of the variable display of the special symbol, the selected small hit symbol (symbol group) is to be stopped and displayed. Depending on the type of the small hit symbol, the opening / closing pattern (opening time, opening number of times) of the large winning opening 54 in the small hit game may be configured to be different.

Subsequently, the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a transition diagram of the gaming state and the effect mode in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, a normal game state, a time-saving game state, a latent probability change game state, and a probability change game state are set as a plurality of types of game states. As the types of the gaming states, (1) the gaming state in which the special symbol probability fluctuation function, the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function are activated is called a "probability change state" or a "probability change game state", and ( 2) The gaming state in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated is called "latent probability variation game state" or "latent probability variation state", and (3) special. The gaming state in which the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function and the electric chew support function are activated without the symbol probability variation function is activated is called "time saving state" or "time saving gaming state", and (4) all functions are activated. The state in which the game is not performed is referred to as a "normal state" or a "normal game state". Here, it can be said that the "probability variable game state", the "latent probability variable game state", and the "time-saving game state" are all advantageous game states for the player as compared with the "normal game state". It should be noted that each gaming state is (1) depending on the combination of the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol (high probability state / low probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (high base state / low base state). ) Probability change game state is "high probability high base state", (2) latent probability change game state is "high probability low base state", (3) time saving game state is "low probability high base state", (4) normal game state Can also be expressed as a "low probability low base state". Here, regarding the function of shortening the variation time of the special symbol, it suffices that the variation time of the special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is at least the subject of the game in the game state, is shortened. That is, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the function for shortening the variation time of the special symbol is operating in the game state (normal game state) in which the variation display of the first special symbol is the main game. The variation time may be shortened, and the variation time of the second special symbol may be shortened in the game state (time saving game state, latent probability variation game state, probability variation game state) in which the variation display of the second special symbol is the main game. ..

FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table in the present embodiment. In the game state setting table, the game state to be transferred after the end of the big hit game is set for each big hit type (type of symbol group). In the present embodiment, when the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the game states after the end of the big hit game are (A) big hit type (type of symbol group) and (B) game at the time of big hit winning. It is set according to the state. The number of continuations of each game state (the number of times of variation display of the special symbol) is the number of probability fluctuations (the number of probability variation operations) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated and the variation time in which the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is activated. It is set based on the number of shortened times (number of times of shortened operation time) and the number of easy ball entry states (number of times of electric support operation) in which the electric chew support function is activated.

When "10R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" or "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B)" is won in the first special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game The latent probability change game state is set as the game state. When shifting to the latent probability changing game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability fluctuation number "100 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "100 times", and the ball entry easy state number "0 times" are set. Therefore, the latent probability change game state continues until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times), and the special If the latent probability change game state ends when the number of times the symbol changes is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), the game shifts from the next special symbol change display to the normal game state, and the next big hit occurs. When the latent probability change game state ends with, the game state shifts to the game state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends.

When "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C)" is won in the first special symbol, the probabilistic gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When shifting to the probabilistic game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability variation number "100 times", the variation time shortening number "100 times", and the ball entry easy state number "100 times" are set. Therefore, the probabilistic gaming state continues until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times), and the special symbol is continued. If the probability change game state ends when the fluctuation display number of When the game state ends, the game state shifts to the game state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends.

When the "4R normal jackpot (symbol group D)" is won in the first special symbol, the time-saving gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability fluctuation number "0 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "70 times", and the ball entry easy state number "70 times" are set. Therefore, the time-saving gaming state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches a specific number of times (70 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specific number of times (70 times), and the special symbol changes. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of display times reaches a specific number of times (70 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next special symbol fluctuation display, and the time-saving game state changes when the next big hit occurs. When it ends, it shifts to the game state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends.

When "10R specific jackpot (symbol group E)", "6R specific jackpot (symbol group F)", and "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G)" are won in the second special symbol, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The game state set after the end of the big hit game is different depending on the above. Specifically, when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state. In the case of a state or a latent probability changing gaming state, the latent probability changing gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. When shifting to the probabilistic game state after the end of the big hit game, the number of probability fluctuations is set to "100 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time is set to "100 times", and the number of times of easy entry is set to "100 times". When shifting to the probabilistic gaming state, the number of probability fluctuations is set to "100 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time is "100 times", and the number of times of easy entry is set to "0 times". Therefore, the probabilistic gaming state continues until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times), and the special symbol is continued. If the probability change game state ends when the fluctuation display number of When the game state ends, the game state shifts to the game state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends. Similarly, the latent probability change game state continues until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified number of STs (100 times), and is special. If the latent probability change game state ends when the number of times the symbol changes is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), the game shifts from the next special symbol change display to the normal game state, and the next big hit occurs. When the latent probability change game state ends with, the game state shifts to the game state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends.

When "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H)" is won in the second special symbol, the probabilistic gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When shifting to the probabilistic game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability variation number "100 times", the variation time shortening number "100 times", and the ball entry easy state number "100 times" are set. Therefore, the probabilistic gaming state continues until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times), and the special symbol is continued. If the probability change game state ends when the fluctuation display number of When the game state ends, the game state shifts to the game state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends.

When the "2R normal jackpot (symbol group I)" is won in the second special symbol, the time-saving gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability fluctuation number "0 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "50 times", and the ball entry easy state number "50 times" are set. Therefore, the time-saving gaming state continues until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches a specific number of times (50 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specific number of times (50 times), and the change of the special symbol. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of display times reaches a specific number of times (70 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next special symbol fluctuation display, and the time-saving game state changes when the next big hit occurs. When it ends, it shifts to the game state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends.

Here, as described above, the occurrence of a big hit can be a trigger for the transition of the gaming state, but the occurrence of a small hit is not a trigger for the transition of the gaming state. That is, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a small hit, the variation display of the final round, which is the end condition of the gaming state (for example, the variation display of the 100th rotation of the probability variation game state and the latent probability variation game state, the time saving game). Except for the change display of the 70th rotation of the state), the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is, and the transition control of the gaming state is not performed with the winning of the small hit as an opportunity. That is, if the gaming state before the occurrence of the small hit is the normal gaming state, the gaming state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also the normal gaming state, and if the gaming state before the occurrence of the small hit is the time-saving gaming state. The game state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also in the time-saving game state, and if the game state before the small hit occurs is the probability change game state, the game state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also in the probability change game state. If the gaming state before the occurrence of the small hit is the latent probability changing gaming state, the gaming state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also the latent probability changing gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the time-saving gaming state, the latent probability-changing gaming state, and the probabilistic-changing gaming state are also referred to as "advantageous gaming states" as the gaming states having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the normal gaming state.

The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol variation pattern random value. Here, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 14, the special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 holds a plurality of types of variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol. The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 selects any variation pattern table from a plurality of types of variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state. The relationship between this fluctuation pattern selection state and the fluctuation pattern table will be described later. Each variation pattern table defines a plurality of variation patterns. In each figure, "selection rate" is shown for convenience of explanation, but in reality, a judgment value (range of random value) for determining the fluctuation pattern is set according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on which determination value the fluctuation pattern random value belongs to. For each variation pattern, the variation time is set for each variation pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and it is premised that the symbol variation by the decorative symbol composed of a plurality of symbols is also executed at the variation time. Is defined as.

Here, the fluctuation pattern selection state will be described. The variation pattern selection state is one of the selection conditions referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation pattern table). In this example, "normal selection state", "limited frequency selection state", "time saving selection state", "latent selection state", and "probability variation selection state" are set as a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern selection states. The normal selection state and the limited frequency selection state are the fluctuation pattern selection states set in the gaming state (normal gaming state) in which none of the special symbol probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function is activated. be. However, when the limited frequency selection state shifts to the normal gaming state based on the end of the advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability-changing gaming state, latent probability-changing gaming state), the limited frequency selection state is for a certain period immediately after shifting to this normal gaming state. (Period over the number of variable display times (4 times) corresponding to the maximum number (4) of operation-reserved balls of the second special symbol: hereinafter referred to as "limited period") In the variable pattern selection state that is set only in a limited manner. be. Therefore, during the execution of the normal game state, the normal selection state is set except for the above-mentioned limited period (the period in which the special selection state is set). The time saving selection state is a variation pattern selection state set in the gaming state (time saving gaming state) in which the special symbol probability variation function does not operate, but the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric chew support function are activated. .. The probability variation selection state is a variation pattern selection state set in the gaming state (probability variation game state) in which all of the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function of the special symbol are operating. The latent probability selection state is a variation pattern selection state set in a gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state) in which the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned limited period is set as a period over the variable display of four rotations corresponding to the maximum number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol, but it is not limited to this configuration. Instead, for example, it may be set as a period over a fluctuation display of 5 rotations or more.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 14, each variation pattern table has different columns to be referred to for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and it is assumed that the same special symbol variation pattern random value is acquired. However, different fluctuation patterns can be selected. Here, the number of operation hold balls (“hold 0”, “hold 1-2”, “hold 3”) described in each figure is, if it is a variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, if it is a lottery. It means the number of activated reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of activated reserved balls after pending digestion), and in the case of the variation pattern lottery of the second special symbol, the number of activated reserved balls of the second special symbol (after pending digestion). It means the number of operation holding balls). The number of operation-holding balls is the number of operation-holding balls existing at the time of lottery of the fluctuation pattern (at the start of the variation display / after the hold-digestion) (excluding the operation-holding balls digested by the variation display). .. As a modification thereof, the total value of the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used. Further, in the limited frequency state, the variable pattern lottery may be performed using a common table regardless of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The variation effect of the decorative symbol performed in conjunction with the variation display of the special symbol is determined based on the type (variation time) of the variation pattern of the special symbol. As a reference, FIGS. 10 to 14 also describe the contents of the fluctuation effect set corresponding to each fluctuation pattern (variation time). In the figure, "ultra-shortening fluctuation", "shortening fluctuation", and "normal fluctuation" are the effects that the three rows of decorative patterns fluctuate and become "off" in so-called disjointed eyes without going through the reach state even once. Is. In the following, ultra-shortening fluctuations, shortening fluctuations, and normal fluctuations are collectively referred to as "non-reach loss". In this non-reach deviation, the variation mode is different from each other in that the variation display stops in a shorter time in the shortened variation than in the normal variation and in the ultra-shortened variation than in the shortened variation. "N reach (normal reach)" is a state in which the same decorative symbol is stopped in two rows (generally the left column and the right column) of the three rows of decorative symbols (reach state), and the remaining one row (general). If a different decorative pattern stops in the middle row), it will be "missing", and if the same decorative pattern stops in the remaining one row (generally, the middle row), it will be a "big hit". "SP reach (super reach)" is a reach production with a relatively higher expectation of big hits than the above N reach, and it develops from N reach, for example, still images and videos such as animation and live-action are displayed. It is a production. "Ultra-long fluctuation" is an effect in which the fluctuation time is set to an extremely long time. "Immediate hit" is an effect in which the fluctuation time is set to an extremely short time, and immediately after the start of the fluctuation display, the "big hit" or "small hit" is immediately obtained without going through the reach state.

(Variation pattern table 1)
FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 1. The variation pattern table 1 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the normal selection state. The variation pattern table 1 is a different table depending on the result of the hit / fail determination (big hit, small hit, miss).

The variation pattern table 1 for loss includes variation patterns PH1-1 (shortened variation), PH1-2 (normal variation), PH1-3 (N reach), PH1-4 (SP reach), and PH1-5 (ultra-long variation). Fluctuation) is set. Here, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is wrong, the fluctuation patterns PH1-1 (shortened fluctuation), PH1-2 (normal fluctuation), PH1-3 (N reach), PH1-4 (SP reach) ) Is selected. At this time, if the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is wrong, the contents of the referenced table are set to be different according to the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol, and the special symbol variation pattern is set. Even if the random number values are the same, different fluctuation patterns can be selected. Specifically, the larger the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively short, and the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is increased. The smaller the number, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively long. On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is wrong, the variation pattern PH1-5 (ultra-long variation) is selected. That is, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is wrong, the fluctuation pattern of the selection target becomes fixed without depending on the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (the second special symbol). Only long-long fluctuations with extremely long fluctuation times are selected).

The variation pattern table 1 for big hit / small hit includes variation patterns PA1-1 (N reach), PA1-2 (SP reach), PA1-3 (ultra-long variation), PA1-4 (ultra-long variation), PA1. -5 (ultra-long fluctuation), PA1-6 (ultra-long fluctuation), and PA1-7 (ultra-long fluctuation) are set. Here, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a specific big hit (10R specific big hit, 4R specific big hit 1, 4R specific big hit), the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (SP reach). Is selected, and if the jackpot type is a normal jackpot (4R normal jackpot), the variation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation patterns PA1-3 (ultra-long variation), PA1-4 (ultra-long variation), and PA1-5 (ultra-long variation) do not depend on the jackpot type. (Variation), PA1-6 (ultra-long variation), PA1-7 (ultra-long variation) are selected. Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation pattern PA1-3 (ultra-long variation) is selected. That is, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol corresponds to a big hit or a small hit, only the ultra-long variation in which the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be extremely long is selected.

(Variation pattern table 2)
FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 2. The variation pattern table 2 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the limited frequency selection state. The variation pattern table 2 is a different table depending on the result of the hit / fail determination (big hit, small hit, miss).

Fluctuation patterns PH2-1 (shortened variation), PH2-2 (normal variation), PH2-3 (N reach), and PH2-4 (SP reach) are set in the variation pattern table 2 for deviation. Here, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is wrong, the fluctuation patterns PA2-1 (shortened fluctuation), PH2-2 (normal fluctuation), PH2-3 (N reach), PH2-4 (SP reach) ) Is selected. At this time, if the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is wrong, the contents of the referenced table are set to be different according to the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol, and the special symbol variation pattern is set. Even if the random number values are the same, different fluctuation patterns can be selected. Specifically, the larger the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively short, and the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is increased. The smaller the number, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively long. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern table 2 and the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table 1 are set to have the same selection tendency of the fluctuation time of the deviation of the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is wrong, the fluctuation pattern PH2-1 (shortening fluctuation) or PH2-5 (SP reach) does not depend on the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol. Be selected. The variation pattern table 2 is set so that the selection tendency of the variation pattern out of the second special symbol is different from that of the variation pattern table 1 described above. That is, the fluctuation pattern table 2 has a shorter fluctuation time of the second special symbol than the fluctuation pattern table 1 described above (a relatively short fluctuation time is more likely to be selected).

Fluctuation patterns PA2-1 (immediate hit), PA2-2 (N reach), and PA2-3 (SP reach) are set in the variation pattern table 2 for big hits / small hits. Here, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a specific big hit (10R specific big hit 1, 4R specific big hit 1, 4R specific big hit 2), the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (SP). Reach) is selected, and if the jackpot type is a normal jackpot (4R normal jackpot), the variation pattern PA2-2 (N reach) or PA2-3 (SP reach) is selected. The fluctuation pattern table 2 and the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table 1 are set to have the same selection tendency of the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a specific big hit (10R specific big hit, 6R specific big hit, 4R specific big hit 1, 4R specific big hit 2), the fluctuation pattern PA2-3. If (SP reach) is selected and the jackpot type is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot), the variation pattern PA2-2 (N reach) or PA2-3 (SP reach) is selected. Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation pattern PA2-1 (immediate hit) is selected. The fluctuation pattern table 2 is set so that the selection tendency of the fluctuation time of the big hit / small hit of the second special symbol is different from that of the fluctuation pattern table 1 described above. That is, in this fluctuation pattern table 2, the fluctuation time of the big hit / small hit of the second special symbol is shortened as compared with the fluctuation pattern table 1 described above (relatively short fluctuation time is easily selected). There).

Here, within the limited period of the normal gaming state in which the variation pattern table 2 is referenced, the average of the variation time of the first special symbol is compared with the outside of the limited period of the normal gaming state in which the variation pattern table 1 is referenced. The values are set to be the same, and the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol is designed to be equal. On the other hand, within the limited period of the normal gaming state in which the fluctuation pattern table 2 is referenced, the average value of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is compared with the outside of the limited period of the normal gaming state in which the fluctuation pattern table 1 is referenced. Is set short and designed to increase the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol (the number of fluctuations per unit time increases).

(Variation pattern table 3)
FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 3. The variation pattern table 2 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the time saving selection state. The variation pattern table 3 is a different table depending on the result of the hit / fail determination (big hit, small hit, miss).

Fluctuation patterns PH3-1 (ultra-shortened variation), PH3-2 (shortened variation), PH3-3 (normal variation), and PH3-4 (SP reach) are set in the variation pattern table 3 for deviation. Here, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is wrong, the fluctuation patterns PH3-2 (shortening fluctuation) and PH3-3 (normal fluctuation) do not depend on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol. , PH3-4 (SP reach) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is wrong, the fluctuation patterns PH3-1 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), PH3-2 (shortened fluctuation), PH3-3 (normal fluctuation), PH3-4 (SP reach). ) Is selected. At this time, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is wrong, the number of operation-reserved balls of the second special symbol (specifically, depending on the presence or absence of the operation-reserved ball of the second special symbol), the reference destination The table contents are set to be different, and different fluctuation patterns can be selected even if the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is relative in the case where the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists than in the case where the operation holding ball of the second special symbol does not exist. It is easier to select a variation pattern that is set short to.

Fluctuation patterns PA3-1 (immediate hit) and PA3-2 (SP reach) are set in the variation pattern table 3 for big hits / small hits. Here, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (SP reach) is selected regardless of the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA3-2 (SP reach) is selected regardless of the big hit type. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation pattern PA3-1 (immediate hit) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 4)
FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 4. The variation pattern table 4 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the latent selection state. The variation pattern table 4 is a different table depending on the result of the hit / fail determination (big hit, small hit, miss).

Fluctuation patterns PH4-1 (ultra-shortening variation) and PH4-2 (SP reach (draw)) are set in the variation pattern table 4 for loss. Here, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is wrong, the variation pattern PH4-1 (ultra-shortened variation) is selected without depending on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is wrong, the fluctuation patterns PH4-1 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and PH4-2 (SP reach (SP reach) do not depend on the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol. One of the draws)) is selected.

The fluctuation pattern table 4 for big hits / small hits includes fluctuation patterns PA4-1 (immediate hit), PA4-2 (SP reach (win)), PA4-3 (SP reach (defeat)), PA4-4 (super). Long fluctuation) is set. Here, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA4-4 (ultra-long fluctuation) is selected regardless of the big hit type. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a specific big hit (10R specific big hit, 6R specific big hit, 4R specific big hit 1, 4R specific big hit 2), the fluctuation pattern PA4-2. If (SP reach (win)) is selected and the jackpot type is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot), the variation pattern PA4-3 (SP reach (defeat)) is selected. If the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation pattern PA4-1 (immediate hit) is selected.

Here, as the production contents of the variable effect described in the figure, "SP reach (victory)", "SP reach (defeat)", and "SP reach (draw)" are all ally characters as enemy characters. It is a battle reach where a battle production that decides the victory or defeat by playing against each other is developed. That is, in the latent probability variation game state in which the variation pattern table 4 is referred to, the battle mode is adopted as the effect mode (small hit RUSH mode described later). "SP reach (victory)" means that when a ally character wins against an enemy character, a jackpot is confirmed in the variable display, and the jackpot type wins a specific jackpot (the jackpot probability is high after the jackpot game ends). It is a battle effect that suggests or notifies (re-entry into the game state set in). "SP reach (defeat)" means that when a friendly character is defeated by an enemy character, a jackpot is confirmed in the variable display, and the jackpot type is a normal jackpot (the jackpot probability is low after the jackpot game ends). It is a battle effect that suggests or notifies (falling to the game state set in). "SP reach (draw)" is a battle effect that suggests or notifies that the deviation is confirmed in the fluctuation display by drawing with the enemy character by the ally character. Therefore, "SP reach (victory)" and "SP reach (defeat)" indicate or notify that the latent probability changing game state ends when the big hit is confirmed in the fluctuation display. (The "subjective mode end suggestion effect" described later), and the "SP reach (draw)" indicates that the latent probability change game state will continue even after the next fluctuation display because the deviation is confirmed in the fluctuation display. It is a continuation suggestion effect of the latent probability change game state that suggests or informs (“latent probability mode continuation suggestion effect” described later). Here, the "end of the latent probability changing gaming state" includes the temporary termination of the latent probability changing gaming state. In other words, if you win in the battle production, the jackpot game is started, so the jackpot game state (normal game state / low probability low base state) is set once, but after the jackpot game ends, it hides again. Since the player will enter the probabilistic game state (excluding "4R specific jackpot 2"), it can be said that the above-mentioned latent probability mode end suggestion effect suggests or informs that the latent probabilistic game state ends "once". .. In addition, if you win a jackpot other than 4R specific jackpot 2 (a jackpot that triggers the transition to the latent probability change game state) among multiple types of specific jackpots, you will be transferred to any of the game states after winning the battle production. If you win the 4R specific jackpot 2 (the jackpot that triggers the transition to the probabilistic gaming state) by notifying you that you will move to the latent probability changing game state, after winning the battle production, It is designed to notify the transition to the probabilistic gaming state by the effect of notifying which gaming state to shift to.

(Variation pattern table 5)
FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 5. The variation pattern table 5 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the probability variation selection state. The variation pattern table 5 is a different table depending on the result of the hit / fail determination (big hit, small hit, miss).

Fluctuation patterns PH5-1 (ultra-shortened variation), PH5-2 (shortened variation), PH5-3 (normal variation), and PH5-4 (SP reach) are set in the variation pattern table 5 for deviation. Here, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is wrong, the fluctuation patterns PH5-2 (shortening fluctuation) and PH5-3 (normal fluctuation) do not depend on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol. , PH5-4 (SP reach) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is wrong, the fluctuation patterns PH5-1 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), PH5-2 (shortened fluctuation), PH5-3 (normal fluctuation), PH5-4 (SP reach). ) Is selected. At this time, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is wrong, the number of operation-reserved balls of the second special symbol (specifically, depending on the presence or absence of the operation-reserved ball of the second special symbol), the reference destination The table contents are set to be different, and different fluctuation patterns can be selected even if the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is relative in the case where the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists than in the case where the operation holding ball of the second special symbol does not exist. It is easier to select a variation pattern that is set short to.

The variation pattern table 5 for big hits / small hits includes variation patterns PA5-1 (immediate hit), PA5-2 (immediate hit), PA5-3 (SP reach (win)), PA5-4 (SP reach (defeat)). )) Is set. Here, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA5-2 (immediate hit) is selected regardless of the big hit type. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a specific big hit (10R specific big hit, 6R specific big hit, 4R specific big hit 1, 4R specific big hit 2), the fluctuation pattern PA5-3. If (SP reach (win)) is selected and the jackpot type is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot), the variation pattern PA5-4 (SP reach (defeat)) is selected. Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation pattern PA5-1 (immediate hit) is selected.

Here, as the production contents of the variable effect described in the figure, "SP reach (victory)", "SP reach (defeat)", and "SP reach (draw)" are all ally characters as enemy characters. It is a battle reach where a battle production that decides the victory or defeat by playing against each other is developed. That is, in the probabilistic gaming state in which the variation pattern table 5 is referred to, the battle mode is adopted as the effect mode (probability variation mode described later). "SP reach (victory)" means that when a ally character wins against an enemy character, a jackpot is confirmed in the variable display, and the jackpot type wins a specific jackpot (the jackpot probability is high after the jackpot game ends). It is a battle effect that suggests or notifies (re-entry into the game state set in). "SP reach (defeat)" means that when a friendly character is defeated by an enemy character, a jackpot is confirmed in the variable display, and the jackpot type is a normal jackpot (the jackpot probability is low after the jackpot game ends). It is a battle effect that suggests or notifies (falling to the game state set in). "SP reach (draw)" is a battle effect that suggests or notifies that the deviation is confirmed in the fluctuation display by drawing with the enemy character by the ally character. Here, if a jackpot other than the 4R specific jackpot 2 (a jackpot that triggers the transition to the latent probability change gaming state) is won among multiple types of specific jackpots, after winning the battle production, any gaming state is reached. If you win the 4R specific jackpot 2 (the jackpot that triggers the transition to the probabilistic gaming state) by notifying you of the transition to the latent probability changing game state, after winning the battle production. , It is designed to notify the transition to the probabilistic gaming state by the effect of notifying which gaming state to transition to. It should be noted that the SP reach (see FIGS. 13 and 14) executed when the gaming state is the latent probabilistic gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state, and the SP reach executed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. The SP reach (see FIGS. 10 to 12) is an SP reach having a different effect content. That is, the SP reach executed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state is merely an effect content that suggests or informs that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, whereas the gaming state is latent. The SP reach executed in the probabilistic gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state is an effect content that suggests or informs whether or not a big hit has been won and the type of the big hit according to the effect result.

In this way, in the fluctuation pattern tables 1 to 5, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is defined for each fluctuation pattern, but regardless of which variation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the special symbol is specified. ) Is set to "0.5 seconds". The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the special symbol is the time when the special symbol is definitively stopped and displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is maintained). In addition, the fluctuation time and the fixed stop time of the decorative symbol are also set corresponding to the fluctuation time and the fixed stop time of the special symbol. As a modification of the variation pattern tables 1 to 5 (FIGS. 10 to 14), in the above embodiment, even if the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol is 0, ultra-shortening variation or shortening variation can be selected. However, when the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol is 0, the ultra-shortening variation or the shortening variation may not be selected. Further, as a modification of the variation pattern table 1 (FIG. 10), in the above embodiment, the variation time value at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol is a plurality, and the variation time value at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol is 1. Although there is only one, the fluctuation time value at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol may be one, and there may be multiple fluctuation time values at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol, and at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol. There may be a plurality of fluctuation time values for each of the fluctuation time value and the fluctuation time value at the time of a small hit. Further, as a modification of the variation pattern tables 3 to 5 (FIGS. 12 to 14), in the above embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time value, effect) at the time of a big hit of the first special symbol in the variation pattern tables 3 to 5 Although the contents) are different from each other, in the fluctuation pattern tables 3 to 5, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol is always immediately hit (the sudden hit when the fluctuation production of the second special symbol is stopped). It may be a 2-second variation pattern without effect (may be composed of a common variation pattern (variation time value, effect content)). Further, the fluctuation pattern (variation time value, effect content) and selectivity of the first special symbol at the time of big hit in the fluctuation pattern table 3 (FIG. 12) are set in the fluctuation pattern tables 4 to 5 (FIGS. 13 to 14). It may be applied to the fluctuation pattern (variation time value, effect content) and selection rate at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In addition, the fluctuation pattern (variation time value, effect content) and selectivity of the first special symbol at the time of big hit in the fluctuation pattern table 4 (FIG. 13) are shown in the fluctuation pattern tables 3 and 5 (FIGS. 12 and 14). It may be applied to the fluctuation pattern (variation time value, effect content) and selection rate at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. Further, the fluctuation pattern (variation time value, effect content) and selection rate at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the fluctuation pattern table 5 (FIG. 14) are set to the first variation pattern tables 3 to 4 (FIGS. 12 to 13). It may be applied to the fluctuation pattern (variation time value, effect content) and selection rate at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. Further, the effect content at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the variation pattern table 3 (FIG. 12) may be no effect, and in that case, after the variation display for 30 seconds, the effect of suddenly hitting the big hit (sudden hit). If the second special symbol is currently being displayed in a variable manner, the effect related to the variable display of the second special symbol may be stopped and suddenly hit). Further, regarding the fluctuation pattern table 3 (FIG. 12) and the fluctuation pattern table 5 (FIG. 14), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) at the time of a small hit of the second special symbol is one type of fluctuation pattern (one type of fluctuation time). However, a plurality of these may be provided. Further, in the time-saving game state and the probability variation game state in which these variation pattern tables 3 and 5 are referred to, even if the small hit variation display is executed, the game ball is entered into the large winning opening 54 in the small hit game. Because it is a difficult situation, it does not notify that the small hit has been won or that the small hit game is in progress, and it looks like an out-of-order fluctuation display as a production, so it is small in the short-time game state and the probabilistic game state. As for the hit fluctuation display, the fluctuation time value may be different depending on the number of operation holding balls as in the case of the loss fluctuation display. For example, when the number of operation holding balls is 0, the operation is performed for "9 seconds". It may be "4 seconds" when there are 1 or 2 holding balls, and "0.5 seconds" when there are 3 holding balls. By approximating the total time of this fluctuation time value and the execution time of the small hit game to the fluctuation time value of the deviation variation display, it is desirable to produce the effect as if it were a single deviation variation display.

Further, since the special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 instructs the effect control board 200 to start the variation of the decorative symbol after selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol, communication with the effect control board 200 is normally performed. A production control command (communication inspection command) for confirming whether or not the command is used, a production control command (variable additional information specification command) including fluctuation additional information (information for adding / subtracting fluctuation time), and a production including fluctuation pattern information. Generate control commands (variable pattern specification commands), effect control commands (symbol specification commands) that include information on character effect numbers (symbol group and game status), etc. (hereinafter, these commands are collectively referred to as "variable start commands". This is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180).

The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 includes a normal symbol hit / miss determination means 146, a normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148. When the normal symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the normal symbol lottery processing means 145 reads out the normal symbol per normal symbol value and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random value stored in the earliest storage area in the normal symbol hold storage area. It is stored in the normal symbol hit / miss determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, respectively. Here, FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram used for explaining the ordinary symbol lottery. (A) in the figure shows a normal symbol winning / failing lottery table, (B) in the figure shows a normal symbol variation pattern table, and (C) in the figure shows a normal electric accessory opening pattern table. Here, the "conditions for starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol" are (a) waiting for the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and (b) the existence of an operation holding ball of the normal symbol. When all of these conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a state in which fluctuation start is possible (a state in which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied).

The normal symbol hit / fail determination means 146 reads a random value per normal symbol from the normal symbol hit / miss determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes a hit / fail judgment, and determines whether the judgment result corresponds to hit or miss. decide. The result of this pass / fail determination is temporarily stored in the normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180, used in the subsequent processing, and then cleared when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 15A, the ordinary symbol winning / failing determination means 146 holds a normal symbol winning / failing lottery table that is referred to when determining whether or not the ordinary symbol is correct. The hit probability of the normal symbol is set to "1 / 1.02" when the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol) is not activated, and the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol) is set. If it is operating, it is set to "1 / 1.01". Therefore, in the present embodiment, the hit is derived with an extremely high probability in the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol regardless of whether the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state.

The normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to a normal symbol stop symbol table (not shown), and if the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is a hit, the predetermined hit symbol (an opportunity for the normal electric accessory 522 to operate). On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is wrong, a predetermined missing symbol (a missing symbol that does not trigger the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 522) is assigned. In the present embodiment, there are three types of symbols (combination of symbols) such as ordinary symbol A, ordinary symbol B, and ordinary symbol C as hit symbols of ordinary symbols that trigger the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 522. ..

The ordinary symbol variation pattern determining means 148 reads the ordinary symbol variation pattern random value from the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, and also refers to the ordinary symbol variation pattern table to refer to the ordinary symbol variation pattern (variation time). ) Is determined. As shown in FIG. 15B, the ordinary symbol variation pattern determining means 148 holds an ordinary symbol variation pattern table that is referred to when determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to "0.5 seconds" when the electric chew support function (function to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol) is not activated, and the electric chew support function (function to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol). Is set to "0.2 seconds" when is operating. That is, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time regardless of whether the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state. Regardless of which normal symbol variation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is set to "0.1 seconds". The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is the time when the normal symbol is definitively stopped and displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is maintained).

Further, the ordinary symbol lottery processing means 145 determines the opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 522 according to the result of the hit / fail determination of the ordinary symbol. As shown in FIG. 15C, the ordinary symbol lottery processing means 145 holds an ordinary electric accessory opening pattern table referred to when determining an opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 522. .. The opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is "1 second opening → 2 seconds closing → 1 second opening → 2 seconds closing → 1 second closing" when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is not activated. It is set to "open", and when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is activated, it is set to "open for 5.9 seconds". That is, as an opening pattern of a normal electric accessory, the opening operation of 1 second is performed three times in the low base state, so the total opening time is "3 seconds", and the opening is 5.9 seconds in the high base state. Since the operation is performed only once, the total opening time is "5.9 seconds".

When the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, the special game control means 150 determines the execution time (demo time) of the big hit start demo and the big hit end demo according to the determined big hit type (symbol groups A to I). Determine the execution time (round time) of the round game. Then, the special game control means 150 instructs the effect control board 200 side to execute an effect control command (referred to as a “big hit start demo command”) and a jackpot end demo effect. An effect control command (referred to as a “big hit end demo command”) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. The jackpot start demo command is also an opportunity for the effect control board 200 to determine the content of a series of jackpot medium effects (big hit start demo effect, round effect, big hit end demo effect) developed during the big hit game. Become. Further, the special game control means 150 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “round effect designation command”) for instructing the start of the round effect corresponding to each round game in each round game during the big hit game. , This is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This round effect designation command includes information on the current number of rounds and information on opening and closing of the grand prize opening 54. Regarding the execution time (demo time) of the big hit start demo and the big hit end demo, not only the big hit type (symbol group A to I) but also the same big hit type (symbol group A) according to the game state at the time of winning the big hit. Even in the case of ~ I), the execution time (demo time) of the big hit start demo and the big hit end demo may be different.

Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination is a small hit, the special game control means 150 determines the execution time (demo time) of the small hit start demo and the small hit end demo. Further, the special game control means 150 includes an effect control command (“small hit start demo command”) for instructing the execution of the small hit start demo effect and an effect control command (“small hit start demo command”) for instructing the execution of the small hit end demo effect. The end demo command ") is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156 causes the first special symbol display device 71 to variably display the first special symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and confirms and displays the first special symbol after the fluctuation display. Let me. Further, the special symbol display control means 156 causes the second special symbol display device 72 to variably display the second special symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and displays the second special symbol after the variation display. Confirm display. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating states of the first special symbol display device 71 and the second special symbol display device 72 are monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means 180. The special symbol display control means 156 requests the effect control board 200 to confirm the decorative symbol when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (that is, at the timing when the value of the special symbol game timer becomes "0"). Generates an effect control command (referred to as a "fluctuation stop command"). The normal symbol display control means 157 causes the normal symbol display device 75 to variably display the normal symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and confirms and displays the normal symbol after the fluctuation display. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the display of the normal symbol. The operating state of the normal symbol display device 75 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means 180.

<Simultaneous fluctuation processing>
Here, the simultaneous fluctuation processing (variation interruption processing, fluctuation forced stop processing) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be described. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram for explaining the simultaneous fluctuation processing (variation interruption processing, fluctuation forced stop processing) in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, as described above, the first special symbol display device 71 is executed by separately and independently executing the determination of the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol and the determination of the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol. A specification (a specification called a so-called parallel machine) is adopted in which the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 72 are executed in parallel at the same time. That is, by separately and independently digesting the operation-reserved sphere of the first special symbol and the operation-reserved sphere of the second special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to the corresponding win / loss lottery and variable display. Etc. are performed in parallel. Therefore, even if the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed for a long time, the variable display of the other special symbol is performed in parallel with the variable display of the one special symbol. Therefore, the variable display of one special symbol is not delayed during the execution of the variable display of the other special symbol. In the following, regarding the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the fluctuation display of the big hit is referred to as "big hit fluctuation display", and the fluctuation display of the small hit is referred to as "small hit fluctuation display". The variable display of is called "off-the-shelf variable display".

≪Variation interruption processing≫
Here, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation display of one special symbol is the big hit variation display, the small hit variation display or the missed variation display, and the variation display of the other special symbol is the small hit variation display. In the situation where the variation display of one special symbol and the small hit variation display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, the variation display of one special symbol is before the end of the variation display of the other. When the small hit variation display of the special symbol ends, the variation display of one special symbol is interrupted from the time when the small hit variation display of the other special symbol ends until the end of the small hit game ( The measurement of the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display of one special symbol is interrupted). Note that the interruption of the variable display is used to mean that the variable display is paused (meaning that it is scheduled to be resumed later). Then, when the small hit game of the other special symbol is completed, the measurement of the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display of one special symbol is restarted, and the measurement time of the fluctuation time before the restart and the measurement time of the fluctuation time after the restart are displayed. When the total time of is reached the predetermined fluctuation time (variation time according to the design value), the fluctuation display of one of the special symbols ends.

≪Variable forced stop processing≫
On the other hand, when the variation display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the big hit variation display and the other special symbol variation display is the small hit variation display or the missed variation display, one of them. In the situation where the big hit fluctuation display of the special symbol of 1 and the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the other special symbol ends. Before, when the big hit fluctuation display of one special symbol is completed, the measurement time of the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the other special symbol is set in advance and the specified fluctuation time (variation time according to the design value). Even before reaching, at the end of the jackpot variation display of one special symbol, the small hit variation display or the missed variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly terminated in conjunction with or synchronized with it. When the small hit variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly terminated, the symbol (confirmed display symbol) that is stopped and displayed at the end of the small hit variation display shall be replaced with a symbol that is out of the small hit symbol. .. That is, the small hit variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the off variation display (as a result, the small hit game is canceled). As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the special game (big hit game) in one special symbol and the special game (small hit game) in the other special symbol compete with each other. If the variation display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol starts as a jackpot variation display, the variation display of the other special symbol that starts variable after that is other than the jackpot variation display. Change display (that is, loss variation display or small hit variation display, and if it is a hit / fail random number corresponding to a big hit in the hit / fail judgment process, the hit / fail judgment result is forcibly replaced with a miss and the missed variation display is used). Is desirable. In addition, when the fluctuation display of one special symbol starts as a big hit fluctuation display, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol that starts to fluctuate after that is out of order and the fluctuation display (whether or not it corresponds to a big hit or a small hit in the hit / fail judgment process). If it is a random number, the result of the hit / fail judgment may be forcibly replaced with the wrong number, and the wrong result may be displayed.

As a modification of the above variable forced stop processing, when the big hit variation display of one special symbol ends, the small hit variation display or the missed variation display of the other special symbol is not forcibly terminated, but one special symbol. From the end of the jackpot variation display of the symbol to the end of the jackpot game, the small hit variation display or the missed variation display of the other special symbol is interrupted (measurement of the variation time related to the variation display of the other special symbol). It may be configured to be interrupted). Then, when the big hit game of one special symbol is completed, the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the other special symbol is restarted, and the measurement time of the fluctuation time before the restart and the measurement time of the fluctuation time after the restart are resumed. Even if it is configured to end the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the other special symbol when the total time with and reaches the preset specified fluctuation time (variation time according to the design value). good.

When the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol is a big hit, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 543 as a big hit game process after the confirmation display of the special symbol, and the special electric accessory control means 160. The object 542 is opened according to a predetermined operation pattern. In the jackpot game, one opening / closing operation of the special electric accessory 542 is regarded as one round game (unit game), and the round game is continuously executed for a predetermined number of rounds. The electric accessory control means 160 holds a large winning opening opening counter for storing the number of operations of the special electric accessory 542 (that is, the number of running rounds). Here, the operation end condition (end condition of the unit game) of the special electric accessory 542 in the big hit game is that a game ball having a specified count number (“10” in this embodiment) enters the big winning opening 54. That is, or the opening time of the large winning opening 54 has reached the opening limit time (“28 seconds”, “2 seconds” in this embodiment).

Further, when the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol is a small hit, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 543 as a small hit game process after the confirmation display of the special symbol. , The special electric accessory 542 is opened for a short time (1.8 seconds). The small hit game is distinguished from the big hit game consisting of a plurality of round games in that it is composed of one round game. Here, the closing condition of the large winning opening 54 in the small hit game (the end condition of the small hit game) is that a specified count number (“10” in this embodiment) of game balls enters the large winning opening 54. That is, or the opening time of the large winning opening 54 has reached the opening limit time (“1.8 seconds” in this embodiment).

Further, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 523 when the result of the hit / fail determination of the ordinary symbol corresponds to the hit, and the ordinary electric accessory 522 (the first) for a predetermined opening time. 2 The starting port 52) is opened. Here, as described above, the electric accessory control means 160 performs the ordinary electric accessory 522 1 second × 3 times (total opening time) in the low base state in which the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is not operating. While opening only for 3 seconds), in the high base state where the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is operating, the normal electric accessory 522 is opened for 5.9 seconds x 1 time (total opening time 5.9). Release only for seconds). Here, the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is that a predetermined number of game balls (“10” in this embodiment) have entered the second starting port 52, or that the second starting port 52 has a predetermined number of game balls. The total opening time has reached the opening limit time (“3 seconds”, “5.9 seconds” in this embodiment).

When the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, the game state control means 165 refers to the above-mentioned game state setting table, the type of the symbol related to the big hit, and the time when the big hit is won. Based on the game state of, the game state after the end of the big hit game is determined, and the game state after the end of the big hit game is switched. In the present embodiment, as described above, as a plurality of types of gaming states, a normal gaming state (low probability low base state), a time-saving gaming state (low probability low base state), and a latent probability changing gaming state (high probability low base state). , Probability variation game state (high probability high base state) is set, and one of a plurality of types of effect modes is selectively set with reference to the above game state setting table. Since the game state setting table has already been described, duplicate explanations will be omitted here. Further, as described above, the occurrence of a big hit can be a trigger for the transition of the gaming state (although the transition control of the gaming state can be executed due to the winning of the jackpot), but the occurrence of the small hit is not the trigger for the transition of the gaming state. (The transition control of the game state due to the small hit winning is not performed).

When the special game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed, the game state control means 165 determines the variation pattern selection state after the end of the special game based on the symbol type of the big hit or the small hit. Switch the variation pattern selection state after the end of the special game. In the present embodiment, a normal selection state, a limited frequency selection state, a time saving selection state, and a probability variation selection state are set as a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states, and a plurality of types of variations are set according to the determined gaming state. One of the pattern selection states is selectively set. Since the fluctuation pattern selection state has already been described, duplicate explanation will be omitted here.

The game state control means 165 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “game state designation command”) including the current game state information and the variation pattern selection state information, and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Store.

The error monitoring control means 170 monitors the input information of the I / O port circuit 104, and inspects the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, the door / frame opening signal, and the like. , Determine whether the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, an effect control command (“error effect designation command”) including the error information is requested to indicate the error state effect to the effect control board 200. Although the description is omitted in FIGS. 4 and the like, the door opening switch is a means for detecting whether or not the glass frame 5 is open, and the frame opening switch is for detecting whether or not the front frame 2 is open. The back set release switch is a means for detecting whether or not the back set board 30 is open. Further, the magnetic sensor and the radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting so-called fraudulent gaming behavior.

The main information storage means 180 includes random number value information acquired in the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, operation holding ball information of the special symbol and the normal symbol, and a game state (probability change state, time saving state,) related to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game. Information on (easy entry state), information on variable pattern selection status, information on winning / failing lottery results (big hit, small hit, miss), information on stop symbols and variable patterns related to special symbols and ordinary symbols, information on special games (round) Number, opening time, opening mode (number of opening per round game), status information indicating the operating status of the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, status information indicating the operating status of the special electric accessory 542, effect control command It is configured to temporarily store data information and the like, and has a predetermined storage area for storing each information.

When a command transmission request is made, the command transmission / reception means 190 is configured to transmit various effect control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 to the effect control board 200 by a parallel transmission method. Has been done. Each effect control command has a 2-byte configuration including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data. In order to distinguish MODE and EVENT, Bit7 of MODE data is "1". Bit7 of EVENT data is set to "0". When transmitting such information as valid, a strobe signal is output at each transmission timing of MODE and EVENT. As a general rule, the effect control command generated in each process is transmitted as one command for each interrupt cycle according to the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

As shown in FIG. 4, the effect control board 200 includes the effect lottery random number generation means 210, the effect control means 220, the lamp control means 230, the accessory control means 240, the error effect control means 250, the sub-main information storage means 260, and the command. Includes transmission / reception means 270. Each of the above-mentioned means in the effect control board 200 is composed of hardware such as a sub-main CPU 201, ROM 202, RAM 203, and an electronic circuit arranged on the effect control board 200, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 202. It is a functional expression of something.

The effect lottery random number generation means 210 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) by the program processing of the sub-main CPU 201. These random number counters play a role as a random number generation means for generating random numbers by software. The software random numbers include a look-ahead lottery random number used for the lottery of the look-ahead effect, a decorative symbol random number used for the lottery of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, a variable effect pattern random number used for the lottery of the variable effect pattern of the decorative symbol, and a notice effect. It includes a notice lottery random number used for the lottery, a big hit effect pattern random number used for the lottery of the big hit effect pattern, a stage lottery random number used for the transition lottery of the effect stage, and the like. As the update timing of these random numbers, the remaining time when the command analysis is not performed in the main process on the effect control side described later (when the effect control command is not received from the main control board 100) is used for the update. do.

The effect control means 220 includes an effect mode control means 221, a hold information display control means 222, a look-ahead notice control means 223, a variable effect control means 224, a decorative symbol control means 225, a notice effect control means 226, and a special game effect control means 227. include.

The effect mode control means 221 is based on the game state designation command from the main control board 100, and is consistent with the game state and the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side. Also called "directing mode"). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, as a plurality of types of effect modes, a normal mode, a time saving mode, a latent probability mode, and a probability variation mode are set, and a gaming state (or a gaming state) managed on the main control board 100 side is set. Any one of a plurality of types of effect modes is selectively set according to the variation pattern selection state) and the like, and the variation effect according to the set effect mode is executed.

Basically, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the "normal mode" is set, when the gaming state is the reduced working hours game state, the "time saving mode" is set, and the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state. When, the "latent probability mode" is set, and when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, the "probability changing mode" is set. However, when the game transitions to the normal state based on the end of the non-normal gaming state (time-saving gaming state, latent probability-changing gaming state, probability-changing gaming state), the above-mentioned limited period changes immediately after the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. In the display, a special effect mode is set, and when the variable display for the limited period is finished, the normal effect mode is set. The limited number of times is "4 times" as the number of times of variation display of the special symbol. This means that the cumulative number of fluctuations displayed for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "4 times". That is, reaching the above-mentioned limited period means that the total number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the number of variation display of the second special symbol has reached "4 times". As a modification of the modification, only the number of times of variation display of the first special symbol reaches the upper limit number (4 times), or only the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol reaches the upper limit number of times (4 times). As an opportunity, the special mode may be terminated (the mode may be shifted to the normal mode). When any of the effect modes is set, the background image (decorative pattern is displayed on the back) dedicated to the effect mode on the screen as an effect (variable effect) suggesting that the user is staying in the effect mode. The background image) is displayed, and the BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11. Since the background image and the BGM are set to be different from each other for each effect mode in this way, the player can recognize which effect mode is currently staying from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing.

The hold information display control means 222 has a first hold ball number counter for counting the number of operation hold balls of the first special symbol, and a second hold ball number counter for counting the number of operation hold balls of the second special symbol. Have. When the hold information display control means 222 receives the symbol storage number command from the main control board 100, the hold information display control means 222 updates (adds) the value of the corresponding counter based on the information on the number of operation hold balls included in this command. On the other hand, when the hold information display control means 222 receives the fluctuation start command from the main control board 100, that is, when the operation hold ball is digested, the hold information display control means 222 updates (subtracts) the value of the corresponding counter. Further, the hold information display control means 222 displays the hold image display unit 710 of the effect display device 70 based on the values of the first hold ball number counter and the second hold ball number counter, and the operation hold ball number of the first special symbol is displayed on the hold image display unit 710. Control is performed to display the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol. Further, the hold information display control means 222 switches to the hold image corresponding to the operation hold ball when the operation hold ball (the earliest operation hold ball) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is digested. Controls the display of the displayed changing image. In the present embodiment, unless explicitly mentioned, the reserved image of the first special symbol and the reserved image of the second special symbol are not distinguished and are simply referred to as a "pending image", and are referred to as a changing image of the first special symbol. It may be simply referred to as a "changing image" without distinguishing it from the changing image of the second special symbol.

The look-ahead notice control means 223 executes a look-ahead determination (referred to as "look-ahead lottery") for the operation-holding ball that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect. The look-ahead notice effect is a so-called continuous advance notice effect that announces the possibility of a big hit or a high expectation effect (for example, reach effect) over one or more variable displays before the operation hold ball to be read ahead is digested. It occurs as one aspect. At this time, the pre-reading lottery is performed based on the information of the pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command from the main control board 100. Here, when the pre-reading advance notice control means 223 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 100, it distinguishes between the information of the pre-determination result of the first special symbol and the information of the pre-determination result of the second special symbol, respectively. Up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) is temporarily stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 in a form combined with the entry order of the operation holding balls. This look-ahead information storage area has the same configuration as the hold storage area of the main control board 100, and holds 1 storage area (first hold storage area) in the order of entry into the start ports 51 and 52. A hold 2 storage area (second hold storage area), a hold 3 storage area (third hold storage area), and a hold 4 storage area (fourth hold storage area) are provided, respectively. Each reserved storage area can store information on the result of pre-determination of hit / fail, information on the result of pre-determination of symbols, and information on the result of pre-determination of fluctuation pattern as a set. The information of the preliminary determination result is stored in the order of hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage area, while hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 It is digested in the order of storage area (principle of first-in first-out). Further, when the information of the preliminary determination result of the reserved 1 storage area is digested, the information of the preliminary determination result stored in the reserved 2 storage area, the reserved 3 storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area is stored in the storage area of the lower number, respectively. At the same time as shifting, the contents of the reserved 4 storage area are cleared to zero.

Although not shown, the reserved image display unit 710 of the effect display device 70 is assigned a reserved image display area for displaying the reserved image and a changing image display area for displaying the changing image. .. In the hold image display area, the corresponding hold image is displayed when the operation hold ball of the special symbol is generated, while the corresponding hold image disappears when the operation hold ball of the special symbol is digested (during change). Switch to the image). The reserved images are displayed in order according to the order in which the activated reserved balls of the special symbol are generated (in order of entry), and the maximum number of reserved images corresponding to the activated reserved balls of the first special symbol is four, and the second special symbol is activated. Up to four reserved images corresponding to the sphere can be displayed respectively. Further, when the earliest reserved image displayed in the reserved image display area is digested, the reserved image is moved to the changing image display area and displayed as a changing image corresponding to the variable display (the variation). It is displayed from the start to the stop of the display). Specifically, each time a special symbol operation hold ball is generated, one hold image (hold image of hold 1, hold 2, hold 3 ...) is additionally displayed, and an operation hold ball of the special symbol is additionally displayed. Each time the image is digested, the variable image displayed in the variable image display area disappears, and the reserved image displayed in the reserved image display area (pending image 1, pending 2, pending 3 ...) is displayed. The image is moved toward the changing image display area one by one, and the earliest reserved image is switched to the changing image and displayed in the changing image display area. Here, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol is the subject of the game in the normal gaming state, and the second special symbol is the subject of the game in the time-saving gaming state, the latent probability-changing gaming state, and the probability-changing gaming state. As the hold display, the hold image of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not necessarily displayed up to eight, and the hold image of the special symbol which is the main body of the game in each game state is up to four. It may be displayed. However, as a modification thereof, in addition to the hold image, a display indicating the number of operation hold balls (for example, a number display such as "0" or "4" is displayed, and the operation hold balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are each displayed. (The one that displays both of the numbers) may be provided, and the number display may be constantly displayed regardless of the gaming state, unlike the reserved image.

The variation effect control means 224 is based on the information (variation pattern information, variation addition information, etc.) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100, and the variation process (effect process) from the variation start to the stop in the variation display of the decorative symbol. ) Is determined by lottery. The variation effect control means 224 holds a plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation effect pattern, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol from the plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables. ) Corresponds to the variable effect pattern table. Here, while the main fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (for example, "SP reach A" or "SP reach B") is determined on the main control board 100 side, the effect control board 200 side is based on the main fluctuation pattern. Sub-variable patterns of decorative patterns (for example, "SP reach A1, A2 ...", "SP reach A2, A3 ...", etc.) that specify the scenario of the effect display process in detail are determined. The variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol defines a variation display mode of the decorative pattern, that is, a scenario of a series of effect display processes from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the end of the variation, and a notice is given at each stage in the display process. The timing for generating the effect is also defined as the time schedule. In addition, regarding the variation effect pattern of this decorative symbol, even if the variation pattern of the special symbol is the same (even if the variation start command of the same information is received), if the effect modes during the stay are different, they are produced mutually. Variable production patterns with different contents can be selected. That is, the variable effect pattern table is prepared for each effect mode during the stay (in the illustrated example, for convenience, only a common variable effect pattern table that does not depend on the effect mode is prepared).

The decorative symbol control means 225 is decorated based on the information (stop symbol information, game state information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100 and the above variation effect pattern determined by the variation effect control means 224. The final combination of stopped symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) is determined by lottery. Details will be described later, but in this example, three symbol rows including a plurality of types of decorative symbols are configured, and the decorative symbols are formed by, for example, identification elements consisting of numbers and the like. As described above, the decorative symbol display unit 700 on the screen displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. At this time, when the variable display of the first special symbol stays in the normal gaming state in which the game is the main body, the decorative symbol mainly corresponding to the first special symbol is variablely displayed on the decorative symbol display unit 700 (the first special symbol). The decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in conjunction with the variable display of In this case, the decorative symbol mainly corresponding to the second special symbol is variablely displayed on the decorative symbol display unit 700 (the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in a form linked with the variable display of the second special symbol). As examples of variations thereof, a decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (referred to as "first decorative symbol") and a decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (referred to as "second decorative symbol"). Is displayed in parallel on the screen, the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second decorative symbol is variable in conjunction with the variable display of the second special symbol. The displayed configuration may be adopted. In that case, a first decorative symbol display unit for variablely displaying the first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol display unit for variablely displaying the second decorative symbol are assigned on the screen. At this time, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be variablely displayed in substantially the same size, or the decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, which is the main body of the game, may be relatively displayed. In addition to the variable display in a large size, the decorative symbol that is not the main body of the game may be variablely displayed in a relatively small size or the decorative symbol may not be variablely displayed.

Further, the decorative symbol control means 225 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables that are referred to when a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols (also referred to as “stop symbol pattern”) is determined by lottery. Examples of the plurality of types of tables include a stop symbol pattern table for large hits, a stop symbol pattern table for small hits, a stop symbol pattern table for loss of reach, and a stop symbol pattern table for non-reach loss. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is formed as a combination of three symbols, and is a "stop symbol indicating a big hit (big hit symbol)", a "stop symbol indicating a small hit (small hit symbol)", and a "stop symbol indicating a miss". (Out-of-order design) ”is included. The jackpot symbol indicating the specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is a combination of stop modes (for example, "7, 7, 7") in which three symbols having the same odd number are arranged. The jackpot symbol indicating a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot) is a combination of three stop modes (for example, "2.2.2") in which three identical even-numbered symbols are aligned. The out-of-order symbol is a combination of stop modes (for example, "1 ・ 3 ・ 8") in which at least one of the three symbols is a symbol with a number different from the other numbers. Here, among the out-of-reach symbols, the out-of-reach symbol is a combination of stop modes (for example, "3.1.3") in which only the middle symbol is displaced back and forth by several frames while the left symbol and the right symbol match. Become. In the case of a small hit symbol or a 2R big hit symbol even if it is a big hit symbol, it may be a combination of predetermined stop modes such as "3, 5, 7". In addition, when the lottery result is out of reach, a specific result called a so-called "chance eye" (for example, "1 ・ 2 ・ 3" or "5, 6 ・ 7" as the order), etc. "2, 2, 3", "5, 5, 6", etc.) may be selected as the deviation. Further, in the case of performing a temporary stop display before the final stop symbol is confirmed and displayed in a pseudo continuous effect (so-called pseudo-ream) or the like, the temporary stop symbol is selected. When displaying a chance eye or a temporary stop symbol, at least one of the three symbols is replaced with a special decorative symbol that displays characters such as "CHANCE" and "NEXT" for the decorative symbol of the number. There are cases (for example, "1 ・ CHANCE ・ 3", "2 ・ NEXT ・ 3", etc.). The stop order for stopping the decorative symbol is predetermined for each of the following variable effect patterns, and in principle, the left symbol → the right symbol → the middle symbol are stopped in this embodiment. However, if the fluctuation time is set to be extremely short, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are stopped almost at the same time, and if it is a special variation effect pattern, the right symbol → It is also possible to stop in the order of the middle symbol → the left symbol, and in this case, the jackpot expectation tends to be relatively high. In addition, regardless of the stop order, it is desirable that the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol start the fluctuation at the same time when the fluctuation starts. However, as a special variation effect pattern, the variation may be started in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

The advance notice effect control means 226 draws a lottery for the advance notice effect pattern that defines the content of the advance notice effect to be executed at each stage of the change process of the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the change effect pattern determined by the change effect control means 224. Determined by. The notice effect pattern includes an effect pattern for displaying an image of a specific character, an animation, or the like temporarily or stepwise, an effect pattern for outputting a specific sound, an effect pattern for operating a movable accessory, and the like. The notice effect is executed in parallel with the variation display of the decorative symbol, and suggests that the symbol variation has a high jackpot reliability in which the symbol variation is stopped in the jackpot mode. The notice effect includes a notice effect that is executed before the reach state occurs (including the time when the reach occurs) in the process of displaying the variation of the decorative symbol, and a notice effect that is executed after the reach state occurs. Each notice effect has a different jackpot reliability, and basically, the notice effect displayed after the reach occurs has a relatively higher expectation of the jackpot than the notice effect displayed before the reach occurs. It's getting higher. The advance notice effect control means 226 holds the advance notice lottery table referred to when selecting the advance notice effect pattern for each type of advance notice effect, and the advance notice according to the type of the advance notice effect generated according to the scenario of the variable effect pattern. The lottery table is selected. As specific types of notice effects, for example, comment notice effects, background notice effects, SU (step-up) notice effects, logo notice effects, mini character notice effects, group notice effects, character notice effects, etc. are prepared. ing. This advance notice effect is basically performed by synthesizing the display of one or a plurality of advance notice effects with the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 70. Therefore, even if the decorative pattern is variablely displayed by the same variable effect pattern, it is possible to generate various effect modes by combining with one or a plurality of advance notice effects.

The special game effect control means 227 has a content of the big hit medium effect (big hit effect pattern) for notifying that the big hit game is in progress and a content of the small hit medium effect for notifying that the small hit game is in progress (small hit effect pattern). ) And decide. The big hit medium effect or small hit medium effect notifies the start demo effect of notifying the start of the big hit game or the small hit game, the round effect notifying that the round game is in progress, and the end of the big hit game or the small hit game. Including the end demo production. When the special game effect control means 227 receives the big hit start demo command or the small hit start demo command from the main control board 100, the big hit medium effect pattern is based on the information of the big hit type stored in the sub-main information storage means 260. Alternatively, the small hit medium effect pattern (start demo effect pattern, round effect pattern, end demo effect pattern) is determined. In this big hit effect pattern or small hit medium effect pattern, a start demo effect time, a round effect time (an effect time according to the opening pattern of the big winning opening 54), and an end demo effect time are set, and the end demo effect time is set. A series of production contents are set along the time axis. Further, the special game effect control means 227 executes the start demo effect when the big hit start demo command or the small hit start demo command is received from the main control board 100 according to the big hit effect pattern or the small hit effect pattern, and rounds. Each round effect is executed when the effect designation command is received, and the end demo effect is executed when the big hit end demo command or the small hit end demo command is received. In the jackpot start demo production, for example, the characters "big hit start" are displayed on the screen to announce the start of the jackpot game. Further, in the round effect, for example, the number of rounds currently being executed and the number of winning prize balls are displayed on the screen, and various images (animation images, etc.) that excite the big hit game are displayed. Then, in the big hit end demo effect, for example, the characters "big hit end" are displayed on the screen to notify the end of the big hit game. The small hit medium effect may be configured with the same effect content as the large hit medium effect described above, or the stop symbol (small hit symbol) of the decorative symbol that triggered the small hit winning is confirmed and displayed. It may be a production that maintains the state. In the present embodiment, the small hit medium effect is not an effect that clearly notifies that the big hit game is currently being executed as in the large hit medium effect (in terms of small hits, the small hit game is currently being executed). (Not a production that clearly informs that the game is), a production before the start of the small hit game (variable production) is continuously performed, and the production is continuously performed during the small hit game and after the small hit game is completed. Then, you may make it appear so that you do not know that you are in a small hit game (as if it were an out-of-order fluctuation display). However, this configuration is premised on the fact that the big hit medium effect is different from before and after the big hit game (a different effect from the variable effect).

As described above, the effect controlling means 220 generates image control commands related to images and sounds based on the determined effect contents (look-ahead effect pattern, variable effect pattern, notice effect pattern, stop symbol pattern, jackpot effect pattern, etc.). This is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260.

The lamp control means 230 controls the lighting of the effect lamp, the emission color, and the like according to the effect content set by the effect control means 220. The lamp control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for controlling the lighting of the effect lamp LP (frame lamp 10, panel lamp 80), and the lamp data corresponding to the determined effect pattern. Is read out, and this lamp control signal (lamp data) is transmitted to the lamp connection board 91.

The accessory control means 240 controls the drive of each movable accessory 24 according to the effect content set by the effect control means 220. The accessory control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for driving and controlling the movable accessory 24, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) according to the determined effect pattern to the motor driver 92. ..

The error effect control means 250 is configured to determine an error effect pattern when an error effect designation command is received from the main control board 100, and notify the gaming machine that an error state has occurred according to the error effect pattern. There is.

The sub-main information storage means 260 is configured to temporarily store decorative symbol information, variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, control command information, and the like, and is predetermined for storing each information. It has a storage area. For example, in the command storage area, an effect control command buffer for storing an effect control command from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing an image control command to the image control board 300, and an image control board 300. Contains an ACK command buffer to store ACK commands from. Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer, and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

The command transmission / reception means 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 and store the effect control command in the effect control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260. The command transmission / reception means 270 generates an interrupt based on the input of the above-mentioned strobe signal from the main control board 100, executes reception interrupt processing (details will be described later) of the effect control command, and issues various effect control commands in this interrupt process. It is supposed to get. When the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the strobe signal, the command transmission / reception means 270 performs the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command with priority over other interrupt processing (interrupt processing of priority level 7 or less described later). ing.

Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 is stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 in order to indicate the execution of the effect contents (variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, decorative pattern information, etc.) set by the effect control means 220. The transmitted image control command is transmitted to the image control board 300 by the serial communication method. As a general rule, the image control command is transmitted every predetermined cycle (500 μs in this example) according to the order set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. As a result, the image control board 300 analyzes various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and causes the effect display device 70 to variablely display the effect image including the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the variable effect pattern. , The notice effect is displayed in the form of being superimposed on the effect of the symbol variation at each stage of the variation display process. Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300, and stores the ACK command in the ACK command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260.

[Game flow]
Next, the game flow of this embodiment will be described. As described above, FIG. 8 is a transition diagram of the gaming state and the effect mode in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, a normal game state, a time-saving game state, a latent probability change game state, and a probability change game state are set as a plurality of types of game states. Then, the normal mode and the special mode are set as the effect mode corresponding to the normal gaming state, the time saving mode is set as the effect mode corresponding to the time saving game state, and the latent probability mode is set as the effect mode corresponding to the latent probability changing gaming state. The probabilistic mode is set as the effect mode corresponding to the probabilistic gaming state. The normal mode and the special mode corresponding to the normal gaming state may have the same mode as the effect mode (background image, effect stage). That is, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern selection state (variation pattern table) is not different for the purpose of differentiating the production mode between the limited period and the non-limited period, but within the limited period. Since the purpose is to quickly digest the operation hold ball (remaining hold) of the second special symbol, it is not necessary to dare to differentiate the production mode (production mode) between the limited period and the non-limited period, but rather the same. It is desirable to digest the operation hold ball (remaining hold) of the second special symbol in the effect mode (effect mode) of.

<Normal game state>
First, in the pachinko gaming machine PM when the power is turned on, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), and the game is started from this normal gaming state. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the first starting port 51 is set higher than the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 52, so that the player hits left. (By launching the game ball aiming at the left area PA1), the game ball is made to enter the first starting port 51, and the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol) is independently executed. It becomes a game to play. While staying in this normal gaming state, the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode or the special mode. In this normal gaming state, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol corresponds to a big hit, the big hit types are "10R specific big hit" 10%, "4R specific big hit 1" 20%, and "4R specific big hit 2". "Is 35%, and" 4R normal jackpot "is generated with a winning probability of 35%. When the jackpot type is "10R specific jackpot 1" or "4R specific jackpot 1", the state shifts to the latent probability variable gaming state after the jackpot game is completed. If the jackpot type is "4R specific jackpot 2", the game shifts to the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, when the big hit type is "4R normal big hit", the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the big hit game is completed.

<Time saving game state>
When the gaming state shifts to the reduced working hours gaming state (low probability high base state), the electric chew support function is activated, which makes it easier for the gaming ball to enter the second starting port 52. By launching a game ball aiming at PA2), the game ball is made to enter the second starting port 52, and the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (variation display of the second special symbol) is independently executed. Will be. In this short-time game state, the probability of winning a big hit in the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is as low as the normal game state, but it becomes a high base state in which the electric chew support function is activated, and the game is played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. Can proceed. While staying in this time-saving game state, the effect mode is controlled to the time-saving mode. In this time-saving game state, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol corresponds to a big hit, the big hit types are "10R specific big hit" 30%, "6R specific big hit" 10%, and "4R specific big hit 1". Is 10%, "4R specific jackpot 2" is 15%, and "2R normal jackpot" is 35%. When the jackpot type is "10R specific jackpot 1", "6R specific jackpot 1", or "4R specific jackpot 1", the state shifts to the latent probability change game state after the jackpot game is completed. If the jackpot type is "4R specific jackpot 1", the game shifts to the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "2R normal jackpot", the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state again after the jackpot game ends. It should be noted that this time-saving game state is continued until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches 70 times, counting from the end of the big hit game. Therefore, when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches 70 times without the next big hit in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state ends and the game falls to the normal game state.

<Hidden probability change game state>
When the gaming state shifts to the latent probability changing gaming state (high probability low base state), the electric chew support function does not operate, so it is normally recommended to hit left aiming at the first starting port 51. In the present embodiment, the frequency of entering the second starting port 52 is set to be relatively high even in this low base state, and the small hit game is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52. By performing a characteristic game that occurs frequently (small hit RUSH: details will be described later), the game ball is hit to the second starting port 52 by hitting right rather than entering the game ball into the first starting port 51 by hitting left. It is a good idea to let the ball enter the ball, and as a result, it becomes a game playability to independently execute the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (variation display of the second special symbol). While staying in this latent probability changing gaming state, the effect mode is controlled to the latent probability mode. In this latent probability change game state, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol corresponds to a big hit, as the big hit type, "10R specific big hit" is 30%, "6R specific big hit" is 10%, and "4R specific big hit 1". Is 10%, "4R specific jackpot 2" is 15%, and "2R normal jackpot" is 35%. When the jackpot type is "10R specific jackpot 1", "6R specific jackpot 1", or "4R specific jackpot 1", the state shifts to the latent probability change game state after the jackpot game is completed. If the jackpot type is "4R specific jackpot 1", the game shifts to the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "2R normal jackpot", the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot game is completed. It should be noted that this latent probability change game state is continued until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches 100 times, counting from the end of the big hit game. Therefore, when the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times without the next big hit in the latent probability changing gaming state, this latent probability changing gaming state ends and the game falls to the normal gaming state. Here, when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state, small hits frequently occur in the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening 54 during the small hit game. , It becomes a game that aims to increase the number of balls to be ejected by a small hit game. That is, while staying in this latent probability variable gaming state, the gaming ball is inserted into the second starting port 52 to frequently display the variation of the second special symbol until the next big hit occurs. , It is possible to execute a small hit game with high frequency. The playability of the latent probability change game state (small hit RUSH mode described later) will be described later.

<Probability change game state>
When the gaming state shifts to the probabilistic gaming state (high probability and high base state), the electric chew support function is activated to increase the ease of entering the game ball into the second starting port 52, so that the game is hit right (right area). (By launching a game ball aiming at PA2), the game ball is made to enter the second starting port 52, and the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (variation display of the second special symbol) is independently executed. Will be. In this probabilistic gaming state, the second starting port 52 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, and the probability of winning a big hit in the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is high, so that the big hit of the second special symbol is likely to occur at an early stage. can do. While staying in this probabilistic gaming state, the effect mode is controlled to the probabilistic mode. In this probabilistic game state, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol corresponds to a big hit, the big hit types are "10R specific big hit" 30%, "6R specific big hit" 10%, and "4R specific big hit 1". Is 10%, "4R specific jackpot 2" is 15%, and "2R normal jackpot" is 35%. When the jackpot type is "10R specific jackpot 1", "6R specific jackpot 1", or "4R specific jackpot 1", the state shifts to the latent probability change game state after the jackpot game is completed. If the jackpot type is "4R specific jackpot 1", the game shifts to the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "2R normal jackpot", the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot game is completed. It should be noted that this probabilistic game state continues until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches 100 times, counting from the end of the big hit game. Therefore, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times without the next big hit in the probabilistic gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state ends and the game falls to the normal gaming state.

Here, in the abnormal gaming state (time-saving gaming state, latent probability-changing gaming state, probability-changing gaming state), the number of variation display of the special symbol ends by the specified number of STs (100 times) or the predetermined number of times (70 times), which is unusual. When the player falls from the game state to the normal game state, a special mode is set as the effect mode within the limited period (4 rotations) immediately after the transition to the normal game state. Since this special mode is an effect mode set when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol) is normally performed. ) Should be the main body of the game, but it is highly probable that the operation holding balls (4 pieces) of the second special symbol generated during the execution of the unusual game state remain, and basically, It is a game that independently executes the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (variable display of the second special symbol). As will be described in detail later, within this limited period, in order to efficiently digest the operation holding ball (remaining holding) of the second special symbol (the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely long). (To avoid), the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is set relatively high. Then, when the limited period of this special effect mode ends (when the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches 4 times), the mode shifts to the normal mode. When shifting to this normal mode, basically, all the operation holding balls of the second special symbol should have already been digested within the limited period, so the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol). ) Return to the playability of executing independently.

In this embodiment, as described above, one combination operating gate 91 and one 92 are arranged in each of the left side region PA1 and the right side region PA2 of the game board 20, and the special symbol is a big hit in any of the game states. Even when the stop display is displayed on the symbol, the jackpot game is started when the game ball is entered into the winning combination operating gates 91 and 92 after the stop display of the jackpot symbol. Therefore, even if the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the jackpot symbol, the jackpot game is not started unless the game ball is passed through the winning combination operating gates 91 and 92.

[Playability in latent mode]
Next, the playability of the latent probability mode (latent probability variable gaming state) will be described. In the latent probability mode (latent game state), when the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 52, small hits are frequently made in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol, and until the big hit is won. It is a game that aims to generate small hit games continuously and intensively. Hereinafter, the latent probability mode is also referred to as a "small hit RUSH mode".

When the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state, when the gaming ball passes through the operating gate 53, a hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1 / 1.02) in the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol. In this latent probability change game state (low base state), if the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is won, the normal electric accessory 522 performs the opening operation for 1 second three times. Therefore, if a right-handed hit is made aiming at the second starting port 52, it is possible or easy to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 while the normal electric accessory 522 is in the open state. be. Further, in this latent probability change game state, the winning probability of the small hit in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1), and the first when the small hit is won. 2 Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), there is a high possibility that small hits will occur frequently based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52.

At this time, if the game ball enters the second starting port 52 and wins a small hit while the ordinary electric accessory 522 is performing the opening operation for 1 second three times, the second special symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display of is completed in an extremely short time, and the small hit game is started immediately. Here, the ordinary electric accessory 522 is configured to perform a closing operation for 2 seconds immediately after performing an opening operation for 1 second (excluding a third opening operation). Therefore, after the small hit game is started, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA2 is the ordinary electric accessory 522 (movable) during the closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 522 for 2 seconds. It is easy to reach the big winning opening 54 by passing through the upper surface of the member 524). Therefore, during the execution of the small hit game, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA2 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 524 without entering the normal electric accessory 522, and is arranged diagonally below the large prize. By flowing down toward the mouth 54, it is possible to enter the big winning mouth 54. Therefore, when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state, the gaming ball is inserted into the second starting port 52 to frequently display the variation of the second special symbol until the next big hit occurs. It is a game that allows small hit games to be executed frequently. As a result, every time a small hit game is executed, about 2 to 3 game balls are inserted into the large prize opening 54, and about 20 to 30 prize balls are continuously acquired each time, so that the player can play the game. It is possible to advance the game while increasing the number of balls held.

On the other hand, even when the gaming state is the reduced working hours gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state, the winning probability of the small hit is extremely high in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation time of the small hit is set to be extremely short. Small hit games are more likely to occur frequently. However, the game playability of the small hit RUSH is limited to only the latent probability variable game state, and for the game states other than the latent probability variable game state, the following measures are taken in order to suppress the increase in the number of balls held by the small hit game. Has been done.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the reduced working hours gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state, when the gaming ball passes through the operating gate 53, a hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1 / 1.01) in the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol. To. In this gaming state (high base state), if the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is won, the normal electric accessory 522 performs one opening operation for 5.9 seconds. Therefore, if a right-handed hit is made aiming at the second starting port 52, it is extremely easy to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 while the normal electric accessory 522 is in the open state. .. Further, even in this time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state, the winning probability of the small hit in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1), and the small hit is won. Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), there is a possibility that small hits will occur frequently based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52. expensive.

Here, if the game ball enters the second starting port 52 and wins a small hit while the ordinary electric accessory 522 is open for 5.9 seconds, the second special symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display ends in an extremely short time, and the small hit game starts immediately. At this time, if the small hit game is executed while the normal electric accessory 522 continues the opening operation (while the second starting port 52 is in the open state), it flows down the right side region PA2. The game ball to be played is extremely easy to enter the open ordinary electric accessory 522, and the possibility of reaching the large winning opening 54 is significantly reduced. On the other hand, if the small hit game is executed after the normal electric accessory 522 is closed and operated (after the second starting port 52 is closed), the subsequent game ball passes through the operating gate 53. Since the time from when the normal electric accessory 522 is opened to the opening operation is set to an extremely short time (variation time 0.2 seconds + stop time 0.1 seconds), this immediately released ordinary electric accessory It is easy for a game ball to enter 522. That is, during the execution of the small hit game, the normal electric accessory 522 (second starting port 52) is almost left open, and the game ball flowing down the right region PA2 is in the open state of the ordinary electric accessory. It is extremely easy to enter the ball into the object 522 (second starting port 52), and it is extremely difficult to enter the ball into the large winning opening 54 arranged downstream thereof. Therefore, when the gaming state is the reduced working hours gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state (high base state), the gaming ball reaches the large winning opening 54 even if small hits frequently occur in the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol. The possibility is extremely low, and it is extremely difficult to increase the number of balls to be played by small hit games.

Even when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (excluding the limited period), the winning probability of the small hit is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1) in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol. However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely long time (10 minutes or more), the player enters the game ball into the second starting port 52 and plays a game aiming at a small hit. Even so, the efficiency of digestion of the second special symbol is very poor, and it is not possible to make small hit games occur frequently. If it is within the limited period of the normal gaming state, the limited frequency selection state is set as the variation pattern selection state, and the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is set to be relatively high (of the second special symbol). The fluctuation time is not extremely long). The reason why the limited frequency selection state is provided as the variation pattern selection state within the limited period immediately after the transition to the normal gaming state to increase the variation efficiency of the second special symbol will be described later.

[About the inrush rate of latent mode]
Next, the inrush rate of the latent probability mode (latent probability changing game state) will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, and the big hit type is "10R specific big hit" or "4R specific big hit 1", the game state at the time of big hit winning. Regardless of the above, the latent probability change game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. For other jackpot types (4R specific jackpot 2, 4R normal jackpot), the latent probability variable gaming state is not set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. .. At this time, regarding the jackpot type of the first special symbol, "10R specific jackpot" is generated with a winning probability of 10%, and "4R specific jackpot 1" is generated with a winning probability of 20%. Therefore, when the result of the winning / failing determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the entry rate (transition probability) to the latent probability changing gaming state is always "30%" regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, and the big hit type is "10R specific big hit", "6R specific big hit", "4R specific big hit", the gaming state at the time of big hit winning is If it is a normal game state, the probability change game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game (the latent probability change game state is not set), and the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the time saving game state, the latent probability change game state, If it is a probabilistic game state, a latent probabilistic game state is set as a game state after the end of the big hit game. That is, when the "10R specific jackpot", "6R specific jackpot", and "4R specific jackpot" are won as the specific jackpot to which the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol are given, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is changed. In the normal game state, the electric chew support function is given after the big hit game ends, but if the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the time saving game state, the latent probability change game state, or the probability change game state, after the big hit game ends. The electric chew support function is not added. At this time, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the variable display of the first special symbol is the main subject of the game, so that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit (so-called accident hit). , It is possible to suppress the transition to the latent probability changing gaming state (small hit RUSH mode), which is the most advantageous state for the player, and to guarantee a fair and equitable game. In addition, when a specific jackpot of the second special symbol occurs in the normal gaming state, by shifting to the probabilistic gaming state instead of the latent probabilistic gaming state, right-handed hitting in the normal gaming state (ball can be entered even in the normal gaming state). By acquiring a specific jackpot of the second special symbol by hitting right at the second starting port 52 where it is easy to enter the ball, a fraudulent act such as forcibly rushing from the normal gaming state to the latent probability changing gaming state (small hit RUSH mode). Can be prevented. For other jackpot types (4R specific jackpot 2, 2R normal jackpot), the latent probability variable gaming state is not set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. .. At this time, regarding the jackpot type of the second special symbol, "10R specific jackpot" occurs with a winning probability of 30%, "6R specific jackpot" occurs with a winning probability of 10%, and "4R specific jackpot 1" occurs. It occurs with a 10% chance of winning. Therefore, when the result of the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal gaming state, the entry rate (transition probability) to the latent probability changing gaming state becomes "0%". If the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is a time-saving gaming state, a latent probability changing gaming state, or a probability changing gaming state, the entry rate (transition probability) to the latent probability changing gaming state is "50%".

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the conditions for shifting to the small hit RUSH mode (latent probability change game state) are made different between the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, and until the small hit RUSH mode is reached. Since it is possible to give variations to the transition method of the game state, it is possible to create a complicated and diverse game playability that has never existed before.

[About the production of latent mode]
Next, the main production contents in the latent probability mode (small hit RUSH mode) will be described. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the latent mode fanning effect as the effect executed during the latent mode. When the effect mode is the latent mode, the variation effect corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed on the screen of the effect display device 70. During the execution of this latent mode, in the variable display of the second special symbol, the latent mode fanning effect for inciting whether or not the latent mode continues or whether or not the latent mode ends is executed. It is possible. The latent mode fanning effect includes a latent mode continuation effect that suggests or notifies that the latent mode continues, and a latent mode end effect that suggests or notifies that the latent mode ends.

During the execution of the latent probability mode (latent probability changing game state), as described above, the SP reach effect (battle effect in which the ally character plays against the enemy character) is executed as the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Can be done. In the present embodiment, this SP reach effect (battle effect) is configured to also serve as a latent mode fanning effect. That is, the latent mode fanning effect is an SP executed during the variable display that the latent mode may continue after the variable display or the latent mode may end at the variable display. It is suggested or notified based on the effect content (effect result) of the reach effect. It should be noted that the "end of the latent mode" includes the temporary termination of the latent mode (latent gaming state). In other words, if you win in the battle production, the jackpot game will start, so the jackpot game state (normal game state / low probability low base state) will be set once, but after the jackpot game ends, you will be submerged again. Since the player will enter the probability mode (latent probability change game state) (excluding "4R specific jackpot 2"), the latent probability mode end suggestion effect is that the latent probability mode (latent probability change game state) ends "once". It can also be said that it suggests or informs.

As described above, the SP reach effect executed in the latent mode is configured as a battle effect in which the ally character plays against the enemy character. If the ally character wins the enemy character in this battle effect, it is confirmed that the "specific jackpot" has been won in the variable display, and if the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, the "normal jackpot" is won in the variable display. It is confirmed that it was done. That is, when this battle effect results in a battle result of victory or defeat, it is confirmed that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed at the end of the fluctuation display, and the latent mode is set when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. It will end. Therefore, the winning or losing effect in the battle effect of the variable display is configured as the latent mode end effect that suggests or notifies that the latent mode ends with the variable display. On the other hand, when the battle effect is a tie, it is confirmed that the shift symbol is stopped and displayed at the end of the fluctuation display, and the latent mode is set even after the end of the fluctuation display (variation display from the next time onward). Will continue. Therefore, in the battle effect of the variable display, the effect that the ally character draws with the enemy character suggests or informs that the latent mode will continue even after the end of the variable display (variable display after the next time). It is configured as a mode continuation effect.

Here, when the effect mode currently being stayed is the latent mode, as described above, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly performed, so that the effect display device 70 is displayed on the screen. , The variation effect corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly performed. On the other hand, when the effect mode during the current stay is the latent mode, the variation display (big hit variation display) of the first special symbol is executed because the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot. At a predetermined timing during the variation display or the stop display of the first special symbol, the variation effect corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly terminated, and the variation display of the first special symbol is supported. Switch to variable production. However, only the variation effect of the second special symbol on the screen is forcibly terminated, and the variation display itself of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 72 is continuously performed. In addition, it is preferable that the "predetermined timing" is, for example, the timing of notifying the result of success or failure in the variation display or the timing immediately before the timing.

At this time, if the hit / fail judgment result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the big hit is not derived in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol until the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is completed. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol, only "small hit" or "missing" is derived. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol, even if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, only the small hit variation display or the missed variation display is lined as the variation display of the second special symbol. Will be. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol, the jackpot variation display of the second special symbol is not performed. Therefore, until the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is completed, the second special symbol is displayed. A battle effect (battle victory effect, battle defeat effect) that suggests or notifies that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, that is, a latent mode end effect that suggests or informs that the latent mode ends. It will not appear.

On the other hand, since the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol is set to an extremely long time (10 minutes), until the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol reaches the final stage (the first special symbol). The variation display of the second special symbol (small hit variation display, missed variation display) can be executed a plurality of times before switching to the variation effect corresponding to the variation display of. Until the big hit fluctuation display of the first special symbol reaches the end, only the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be executed, and the fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be executed. As the effect, an effect (including a battle draw effect) that suggests or notifies that the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a small hit or a miss can be executed. That is, it is certain that the latent mode will continue until the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol ends, and until the variation effect corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is switched to. As a variation effect corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, a battle draw effect that suggests or notifies that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is out of order, that is, suggests that the latent mode is continued. The latent mode continuous production can be executed. In addition to the latent mode continuous effect, the second is in addition to the latent mode continuous effect until the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol reaches the final stage (until it is switched to the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol). The small hit winning effect that is performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol can be executed. In addition, this small hit winning effect may be included as a kind of latent mode continuous effect.

[About the fluctuation state of the special mode]
Next, the fluctuation state of the special mode will be described. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram for explaining the fluctuation state of the special mode. As described above, the latent probability change game state continues until the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs. Therefore, the latent probability change game state ends when the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times) without the next big hit. Then, when this latent probability change gaming state ends, the player falls into the normal gaming state. This normal gaming state is a low-probability low-base state, and is basically a gaming property in which a game ball is inserted into the first starting port 51 and the variation display of the first special symbol is independently performed. In this normal gaming state, as in the latent probability changing gaming state described above, although the electric chew support function is not operating, the ease of entering the ball of the second starting port 52 is secured to some extent, and it is realistic. Can or easily allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 by hitting right.

At this time, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (when the player falls from the latent probability changing gaming state to the normal gaming state), the second special symbol is changed in order to limit the situation where the small hit game frequently occurs in this normal gaming state. By setting the time to an extremely long time, it is desirable to suppress the act of hitting right (aiming at the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52) in this normal game state. When the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state, as described above, the gaming ball is entered into the second starting port 52 and the variation display of the second special symbol is independently executed. Therefore, the gaming state is latent. At the end of the probabilistic gaming state (at the time of transition to the normal gaming state), there is an extremely high possibility that the operation holding ball of the second special symbol remains. Therefore, the specification is such that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed for an extremely long time by digesting the operation holding ball of the second special symbol in several rotations immediately after the transition to the normal gaming state. In particular, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation display, a special screen (still image) suggesting or notifying the jackpot winning is continuously displayed for a long time while the fluctuation display is being executed. As a result, beginners and the like cannot understand the current game situation (what is happening), which may cause a sense of discomfort to many players. Therefore, for the limited period immediately after shifting from the advantageous gaming state (time saving gaming state, latent probability changing gaming state, probability changing gaming state) to the normal gaming state, the variable pattern selection state is set to the limited frequency selection state, and the second special By shortening the fluctuation time of the symbol, the residual hold of the second special symbol can be digested at high speed.

First, also in the present embodiment, as a general rule, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, outside the limited period (normal mode), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is extremely long for the same purpose as before. It is set to (10 minutes or more) to suppress the act of hitting right in the dark. Specifically, outside the limited period of the normal gaming state (normal mode), the variation pattern selection state is set to the normal selection state, so that the variation time of the second special symbol can be set in the variation pattern table 1 (FIG. 10). It will be referenced and selected. In this normal selection state, the variation display time of the second special symbol is extremely long, regardless of the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol, so that the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is extremely poor. It becomes a thing. As a modification thereof, at least only the small hit fluctuation display may be set as an extremely long fluctuation time.

On the other hand, within the limited period (special mode) immediately after the transition to the normal gaming state, the variation pattern selection state is set to the limited frequency selection state, so that the variation time of the second special symbol can be set to the variation pattern table 2 (special mode). It will be selected with reference to FIG. 11). When the variation pattern selection state is the limited frequency selection state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened regardless of the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol, and the variation pattern selection state is the normal selection state. The average value of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes shorter than that of the second special symbol. That is, in the variation display within the limited period immediately after the transition to the normal gaming state (variation display within 4 rotations), the variation display after the lapse of this limited period (variation display after the 5th rotation) is the second. The fluctuation time of the special symbol (average value of the fluctuation time) is shortened, and the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is set to be high. Therefore, within the limited period immediately after the transition to the normal gaming state, the operation holding ball (remaining holding) of the second special symbol can be digested at high speed (the variable display for an extremely long time is executed as before). Even if the player falls from the latent probability changing gaming state to the normal gaming state, the speedy gaming is performed within the limited period, so that the player can proceed with the gaming without discomfort. As a modification of the present embodiment, with respect to FIG. 18, the variation display of the first special symbol in the latent probability variation gaming state may be set to "short variation" as in the variation display of the second special symbol. Further, with respect to FIG. 18, the main effect within the limited period of the normal gaming state may be a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed or is performed. As a simple display mode such as reduced display, a public effect is performed only when a big hit occurs, and other than that, a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed).

Regarding the variable pattern selection state, the limited frequency selection state within the limited period is the same as the normal selection state outside the limited period, and the gaming state is the normal gaming state (the gaming state in which the special symbol variation time shortening function is not activated). Since it is a variation pattern selection state that is set in response to the above, the latency that is set corresponding to the latent probability variation game state (the game state in which the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is activated) before the transition is performed. Compared with the definite selection state, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is relatively low. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is in the order of "normal game state (normal mode)" <"normal game state (special mode)" <"latent probability change game state (latent mode)". It is configured to be high. In other words, the average value of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter in the order of "normal game state (normal mode)" <"normal game state (special mode)" <"latent probability change game state (latent mode)". Become. Regarding the relationship between the length of the average value of the fluctuation time, the same relationship is established in the advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability-changing gaming state) other than the latent probability-changing gaming state. Therefore, in FIG. 18 above, the process of transitioning from the latent probability-changing gaming state to the normal gaming state is described, but instead, the process of transitioning from the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state to the normal gaming state is applied. However, the same relationship as described above is established, and the same action / effect can be obtained. In addition, as a term used in the above, "average value of fluctuation time (variation display time)" is an average value based on the actual measurement value obtained by actually measuring the fluctuation display time for each fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is not limited to the meaning of taking a value. More specifically, it should be determined (selected) even when it is configured to determine the variation display time for each variation display (every start of variation) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When there are multiple types of variable display time candidates, the expected value based on the multiple types of variable display time (the sum of "selection probability x variable display time" at each variable time, and as an example, a certain variable state (is there). When 10 seconds is selected as 50%, 30 seconds as 30%, and 60 seconds as 20% in the state of referring to the fluctuation pattern table), "10 seconds x 0.5 + 30 seconds x 0.3 + 60 seconds x" "0.2 = 26 seconds" is the average value of the variable display time), but if there is only one type of variable display period candidate to be selected, that one type of variable display period itself is the average value. (For example, if there are only 10 seconds of selection candidates in a certain fluctuation state (a state of referring to a certain fluctuation pattern table), "10 seconds x 1.0 (100%) = 10 seconds" is displayed as a fluctuation. It is the average value of time). As a realization method for making the "average value of the variable display time" different, the candidate and / or the selection probability of the variable display time is made different, or even if the candidate and / or the selection probability of the variable display time is the same, further. There are various methods such as making the period value when adding the variable display time different, but the method is not limited to either method.

[Regarding the production mode of the special mode]
Next, the effect mode of the special mode will be described. Here, if the hit / fail judgment result of the second special symbol becomes a big hit (so-called accident hit) within a few rotations immediately after the transition to the normal gaming state, the special screen (still image) suggesting or notifying the big hit winning is extremely. It is desirable that the display is continuous for a long period of time, but by performing such a display, a skilled player or the like recognizes the occurrence of a big hit and until the long-term variation display of the second special symbol is completed. During that time, the launch of the gaming ball may be stopped so as not to reduce the number of balls held, and the operating rate of the gaming machine may decrease.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, within the limited period immediately after the transition to the normal gaming state, as described above, the variation pattern selection state is set to the limited frequency selection state, and the average of the variation time of the second special symbol is set. By shortening the value and displaying the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol on the screen of the effect display device 70, the special screen for an extremely long time is not displayed, and the player can use it. The launching of the gaming ball will be continued without discomfort, and it will be possible to prevent the operating rate of the gaming machine from decreasing.

[Common gates for continuous operation]
In the conventional gaming machine, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol generated during the latent probability changing gaming state is digested within a few rotations immediately after the latent probability changing gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is entered. The variable display of the second special symbol is easy to be performed. At this time, when the hit / fail judgment result of the second special symbol is a big hit (so-called accident hit), if the combination operation gate is arranged only in the right side area PA2 (near the big winning opening 54), the game is played. If a person does not know the existence of the winning combination gate, or cannot recognize the occurrence of this jackpot, and is hitting left at the first starting port 54, the waiting state of the jackpot game continues for a long time (quite difficult). The jackpot game cannot be started), and the game may not proceed smoothly.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 1, the first unit is arranged in the left side region PA1 on the premise that the game is advanced by aiming at the first starting port 54 by left-handed while the normal game state is being executed. When the starting port 51 is also used as the first combination operating gate 91 and the game ball enters the first starting opening 51, it means that the game ball has passed through the first combination operating gate 91 at the same time (the game ball is the first). If it is detected by the start port switch 511, it is detected by the first combined operation gate switch 911 at the same time). That is, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the player mainly plays the game in which the game ball is entered into the first starting port 51 by left-handing, so that the gaming ball is inserted into the first starting opening 51. If the ball can be made to ball, as a result, the game ball is also passed through the first role continuous operation gate 91. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, a big hit (so-called accident hit) is obtained by digesting the operation holding ball (remaining holding) of the second special symbol that occurred in the latent probability changing gaming state before the transition. Even if it occurs, based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 51, the game ball is treated as having passed through the first combination operating gate 91, so that the game shifts to a big hit game without delay. Can be made to. Therefore, if the player who is playing the game with the game machine PM ends the game due to the fact that the game state has fallen to the normal state (when the player leaves the game machine), he / she sits down next. When the player starts the game, he / she should first aim at the first starting port 51 to proceed with the game. Therefore, when a big hit (so-called accident hit) occurs based on the operation holding ball of the above second special symbol. Even so, by letting the gaming ball enter the first starting port 51, the gaming ball eventually passes through the first winning combination operating gate 91, and the big hit game is started accordingly. Become. Then, if the jackpot notification effect is performed to notify the occurrence of the jackpot at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port (first winning combination operating gate 91), the player can generate the jackpot without causing discomfort. Can be recognized.

[External information signal]
Next, the external information signal output from the external information terminal board 600 will be described. In the present embodiment, the external information signals that the external information terminal plate 600 outputs as external information to an external device outside the machine include a jackpot signal, a continuous villa signal, a symbol confirmation signal, and the like. The external information signal also includes other signals such as a prize ball signal, a door frame opening signal, a magnetic sensor abnormality signal, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, and an abnormality sensor detection (ball entry passage time abnormality, etc.) signal. However, since it is a known technique, the description thereof will be omitted below.

External devices installed outside the gaming machine PM include a data display, a hall computer, and the like. The data display is a device installed above the gaming machine PM and displaying data (game information) related to the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display can be a useful judgment material for the player to select a game machine. The hall computer aggregates the operating states of each gaming machine (this gaming machine PM is one of them) based on the external information signal output from each gaming machine installed in the hall inside the gaming store, and makes each game. It is a device that manages the operating status of machines. The hall computer may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM via a data display, or may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM without going through a data display.

Here, as terms used in the following, the terms "conditional device" and "accessory continuous device" both mean a conceptual device (control device). The condition device is a device that is a condition for operating the accessory continuous operation device. This conditional device is a conceptual device that is configured mainly on the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) and operates when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a jackpot symbol. The accessory continuous operation device is a device that operates when the condition device is activated in a model that does not have a combination operation gate, and in a model that has a combination operation gate, after the condition device is activated, It is a device that operates when the game ball enters the combined operation gate. This accessory continuous operation device is mainly composed of the main control board 100 (main CPU 101), and is a conceptual device for continuously operating the special electric accessory 542.

FIG. 19 is a time chart of the jackpot signal. The jackpot signal is an external information signal indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The jackpot signal is a condition of either the special symbol display device 71 or 72 in a state where at least one of the special symbol probability variation function and the special symbol variation time shortening function is operating (a gaming state other than the normal gaming state). When the special symbol (big hit symbol) on which the device is to be operated is confirmed and displayed, from the time when the confirmed display time (display time after confirmation) of this special symbol has elapsed until the operation of the conditional device is completed. Output on. As described above, the fixed display time of the special symbol is set to "0.5 seconds". The definite display time of this special symbol is the time when the special symbol is definitively stopped and displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is maintained). However, the second special symbol (big hit symbol) in which the condition device is activated on the second special symbol display device 72 when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is not activated. When the condition device is activated based on the confirmation display, the jackpot signal is output on from the time when the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is started until the operation of the condition device is completed. .. That is, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), the second special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the jackpot signal. It is output on from the start of operation of the accessory continuous operation device, not when the confirmed display time has elapsed. Here, in the present embodiment, after the condition device is operated, the accessory continuous operation device starts the operation on the condition that the game ball has passed through the combination operation gates 91 and 92, so that the jackpot signal The output start timing of is dependent on the timing at which the game ball passes through the winning combination operation gates 91 and 92. As described above, the reason why the jackpot signal is output from the start of operation of the accessory continuous actuating device at the time of the jackpot of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state is that the gaming state is from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state. When the player finishes the game and the game machine PM is vacant due to the fall to, the operation pending ball of the second special symbol within the limited period after falling into the normal game state. When a so-called accident jackpot occurs due to the digestion of (remaining hold that occurred during the advantageous gaming state), when the jackpot signal is output from the time when the final display time of the second special symbol has elapsed, the game machine PM Based on the game information displayed on the data display of, it is revealed in advance that this game machine PM is a big hit, and only a specific player who happens to know it will benefit. Is caused by.

FIG. 20 is a time chart of the signal during the consecutive villas. The signal during the villa is an external information signal indicating that the villa is in the villa. In principle, the signal during the consecutive villas is the special symbol display device 71 in a state where at least one of the special symbol probability variation function and the special symbol variation time shortening function is operating (a gaming state other than the normal gaming state). , 72, the special symbol (big hit symbol) to which the condition device is to be activated is confirmed and displayed, and the condition device is activated from at least when the confirmation display time (display time after confirmation) of this special symbol has elapsed. It is output on until it ends (the additional period will be described later). However, the second special symbol (big hit symbol) in which the condition device is activated on the second special symbol display device 72 when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is not activated. When the condition device is activated, the continuous villa signal is output on at least from the start of the operation of the accessory continuous operation device to the end of the operation of the condition device. The additional period will be described later). That is, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), the second special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped at the continuous villa signal. It is output on from the start of operation of the accessory continuous operation device, not when the displayed confirmed display time has elapsed. Here, in the present embodiment, after the condition device is activated, the accessory continuous actuation device starts to operate on the condition that the game ball passes through the combination actuation gates 91 and 92. The output start timing of the middle signal depends on the timing at which the game ball passes through the winning combination operation gates 91 and 92. In this way, the reason why the continuous villa signal is output from the start of operation of the accessory continuous operation device at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state is that the above jackpot signal is output from the start of operation of the accessory continuous operation device. It is the same as the reason for outputting. In addition to the above-mentioned on-output period (in the form of being continuously connected to the end of the operation of the condition device), the above-mentioned additional period of the signal during the consecutive villas is the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol or the special symbol. It is output on while the variable time shortening function is operating, that is, while the advantageous gaming state (time saving gaming state, latent probability changing gaming state, probability changing gaming state) continues.

FIG. 21 is a time chart of the symbol confirmation signal. The symbol confirmation signal is an external information signal that is turned on and output for a predetermined time (for example, about 0.1 seconds) each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops fluctuating. However, after the special symbol probability fluctuation function or the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function starts operating, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops 100 times in total (specified ST number of times) and is confirmed. If the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped before the display time (stop display time) has elapsed, the symbol confirmation signal is not output on as a trigger when the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped. .. That is, when the gaming state is an advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state, latent probabilistic gaming state), the variable display of the second special symbol becomes the subject of the game, so that the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. The symbol confirmation signal is not output on when the symbol is stopped, and the symbol confirmation signal is output on when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped. On the other hand, after the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol or the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol starts to operate, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops a total of 100 times (specified ST number of times) and is confirmed. If the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped except until the display time (stop display time) has elapsed, the symbol confirmation signal is output on when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped. Not done. That is, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the variable display of the first special symbol becomes the main subject of the game, so that the symbol confirmation signal is turned on and output when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. The symbol confirmation signal is turned on and output when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is stopped. That is, in the present embodiment, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol of the main player of the game is stopped according to the game state during the current stay. , The symbol confirmation signal is turned on and output.

As a modification, when the jackpot variation display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped, the variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped. May be configured so that the symbol confirmation signal is not turned on and output when the variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped. That is, in the above embodiment, as described above, when the gaming state is an advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability-changing gaming state, latent probability-changing gaming state), the variable display of the second special symbol becomes the main body of the game. , The symbol confirmation signal is not output on when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is stopped, and the symbol confirmation signal is on and output when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped. For example, as the above-mentioned simultaneous fluctuation processing (variation forced stop processing), the large hit fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the second special symbol are performed at the same time. When the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol is stopped first, and at the same time as that, the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped. 2 The symbol confirmation signal is not turned on when the small hit variation display or the missed variation display of the special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the symbol confirmation is triggered when the big hit variation display of the first special symbol is stopped. It may be configured to output a signal. Further, as another modification, the first starting port 51 is configured as a normal electric accessory (electric chew) in a time-saving gaming state (low probability high base state) in which the electric chew support function is operated a predetermined number of fluctuation display times. In this case, the symbol confirmation signal is not output on the trigger when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped, and when the second starting port 52 is configured as a normal electric accessory (electric chew), the first It may be configured so that the symbol confirmation signal is not output on when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped.

<Processing on the main control board side>
Next, the procedure of the operation processing in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 37. The processing on the main control board 100 side includes a main control side main processing and a main control side timer interrupt processing.

<< Main processing on the main control side >>
22 to 23 are flowcharts showing the main processing on the main control side of the main control board 100. In this main control side main process, after the security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by resetting when the power is turned on, the program is started and the processes after S1 are started.

First, as the initial setting required when the power is turned on, the start address is set as the initial value of the stack area in the stack pointer (S1), and the access permission of the RAM 103 is granted (S2). Subsequently, a vector table in which the start address of the program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs is set (S3), and an initial value is set in the built-in register of the main CPU 101 (S4).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5). When the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5: YES), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero in S9, which will be described later. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not turned on (S5: NO), the value of the power off information flag is read to determine whether or not the power off normal information is stored (S6).

Here, when the information on the normal power failure is stored (S6: YES), the checksum is calculated for the predetermined area of the RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (S8). The checksum at power-on calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off process described later, so if it is backed up normally, the checksum at power-on will be checked. Sam becomes "0". In this way, it is determined at the time of turning on the power whether or not the information stored in the RAM 103 before the power is turned off is correctly backed up. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12, which will be described later, in order to return to the state before the power was turned off. On the other hand, when the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, the initialization data at the time of turning on the power is set in the RAM 103 (S10). Subsequently, in order to initialize the effect display device 70, initialize the effect lamp LP, and the like, an effect control command (“effect initial command”) to the effect control board 200 is requested (S11).

Next, in the power-off / recovery setting process, the power-on normal information is set, various errors are initially set, and the communication with the payout control board 400 is initially set in the RAM 103 (S12). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to save that the power-on was performed correctly, the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, and the information of the power-off occurrence is initialized. Turn off the power off confirmation flag. Next, the data transfer source address, the data transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes are set, and the data corresponding to the number of transfer bytes is transferred (S13). Then, the value of the special symbol game status at the time of power off is read, and the power off / return process related to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

Subsequently, a transmission request for an effect control command (“power supply off / return command”) at the time of power failure / recovery between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 is performed (S15). This power-off / recovery command includes information on the communication line inspection, the operating state of the special symbol, the number of probability fluctuations, the number of time reductions, the number of easy ball entry states, the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the error state. The untransmitted command request before the power is turned off is cleared. Next, in the symbol storage number command request processing, the information on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the power is turned off is read, and an effect control command including the information on the number of operation-holding balls is requested (. S16).

Subsequently, a return setting is made to return the normal electric accessory 522 to the state before the power is turned off (for example, the second start port 52 is in the open state) (S17). Further, a return setting is made to return the special electric accessory 542 to the state before the power is turned off (for example, the large winning opening 54 is in the open state) (S18). Subsequently, the value of the probability change flag is read, and the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol when the power is turned off is set (S19). The probability variation flag is a flag for setting the operation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game (a flag indicating that the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is operating). Next, in order to activate the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as the initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and the timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Subsequently, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S21). Then, the clear word 1 (“55H”) is set in preparation for restarting the watchdog timer (S22).

Next, in order to determine the occurrence of the power cut, the value of the power cut confirmation flag is read, and it is determined whether or not the power cut has occurred (S23). If the power is not cut off, the initial value random number update process is executed (S24). In this initial value random number update process, in this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to "0" which is the minimum value.

Next, interrupt permission is set to allow the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S25), the process returns to the above-mentioned interrupt prohibition processing (S21), and the loop processing of S21 to S25 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt processing is periodically executed at predetermined intervals, but the remaining time between the completion of the previous interrupt processing and the occurrence of the next interrupt processing is used to utilize the remaining time from S21 to S25. Repeat the process up to. Then, when an interrupt request is made in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process is started when the interrupt is enabled in S25. On the other hand, when the power-off confirmation flag is turned on in S23, that is, when the power-off has occurred, the process proceeds to S26 and the power-off processing described below is executed.

Next, as the power cutoff processing (S26 to S32), first, the clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set in order to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether or not the content of the power-off information flag is the power-on normal data (S27). In the case of power-on normal information (S27: Yes), the power-off normal data is set in the power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, when the power-on normal information is not (S27: No), the power-off abnormality data is set in the power-off information flag (S29), and the process proceeds to S32.

Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the RAM 103 (S30). Then, the complement for the checksum data is calculated, and the result value of this complement is set in the checksum area of the RAM 103 (S31). Subsequently, the access prohibition setting of the RAM 103 is set (S32), and the process is looped until the power is turned off.

<< Main control side timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the timer interrupt process on the main control side of the main control board 100 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. This timer interrupt process is started by a clock pulse at regular time intervals (for example, 4 ms) from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110, and is executed in the form of interrupting the above-mentioned main control side main process.

First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the main CPU 101 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 103, and then the interrupt operation condition is set (S51).

Next, the clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set in order to restart the watchdog timer (S52). At this time, the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted by writing the clear word 1 and the clear word 2 in order to the WDT clear register of the CPU 101 within the preset time-out time. That is, when the main CPU 101 is executing the program normally, the clear words 1 and 2 are set periodically, so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before the time-out. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Next, the input process is executed (S53). In this input process, information on switches other than the RAM clear switch is read as various switches connected to the main control board 100. That is, the first start port switch 511, the second start port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531 and the large winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switch 611, 641, the door opening switch, the frame opening switch, the back set opening switch, and the magnetic sensor. , Radio sensor, etc. are read, their status is determined, and then these detection information is stored.

Next, various random number update processes are executed (S54). In this various random number update process, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation pattern random number are updated. For the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number, the numerical value of the random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0". On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number, a predetermined value (for example, 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the subtracted result is less than 0, a predetermined value (for example, 50,000) is added to the subtracted result.

Next, the initial value update type random number update process is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number update process, a random number per normal symbol, a soft random number per special symbol, and a symbol random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to "0" which is the minimum value. When the value of the counter makes one round, the value of the corresponding initial value random number is set as the initial value.

Next, the initial value random number update process is executed (S56). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to "0" which is the minimum value.

Next, the timer subtraction process is executed (S57). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used for the game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the values of various timers are subtracted by the interrupt period (4 ms in this example). The various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, confirmed display time) related to the fluctuation display and the stop display by the special symbol display devices 71 and 72. A specified fluctuation time is set in the special symbol game timer at the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and is subtracted as the time elapses. If the small hit game of the other special symbol is executed during the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, one of the small hit games is being executed. The timekeeping of the variable display of the special symbol is interrupted.

Next, the second start port validity period setting process is executed (S58). In this second starting port valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the second starting port 51 are determined, and as the determination result, the valid period data or the invalid period data of the second starting port 51 is set.

Next, the winning monitoring process is executed (S59). In this winning monitoring process, the first starting port switch 511, the second starting port switch 521, the operating gate switch 531 in the input process (S53), the large winning port switch 541, the general winning port switch 611, and the combined operation gate switch. Based on the detection information of 911, 921, the switch passage inspection of the game ball is performed, and as a result, when it is determined that the game ball has passed each switch, the information indicating that the game ball has passed each switch is stored in the main information. In addition to temporarily storing the winning information in the winning information storage area of the means 180, a transmission request for an effect control command including information indicating that the game ball has passed each switch is performed. The details of this winning monitoring process (S59) will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

Next, the prize ball control process is executed (S60). In this prize ball control process, a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 400 in order to instruct the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize type based on the detection result in the above-mentioned prize ball monitoring process, and the payout control board 400 is used. The communication received data from the payout control board 400 is monitored and the communication with the payout control board 400 is inspected.

Next, the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process is executed (S61). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 is monitored, and when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the operation gate 53, a random number related to the normal symbol lottery is acquired as operation hold ball information. , The number of balls on hold for operation is updated up to a maximum of 4, and random numbers related to the normal symbol lottery are stored.

Next, the normal symbol control process is executed (S62). In this normal symbol control process, since a series of processes related to the normal symbol display device 75 or the normal electric accessory 522 is performed, the normal symbol changing process and the normal symbol stop symbol display process are performed according to the value of the normal symbol game status. , Processing during operation of ordinary electric accessory, processing during demonstration during operation of ordinary electric accessory, etc. are executed. In the normal symbol change processing, the display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) in order to display the normal symbol in a variable manner or to confirm it.

Next, the normal symbol change start monitoring process is executed (S63). In this normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process, when the operating state of the normal symbol is monitored and it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied, one normal symbol operation pending ball number is digested and the normal symbol is activated. The hit / fail judgment, the symbol judgment, the fluctuation pattern judgment, the fluctuation time setting, etc. are performed in order.

Next, the start port monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this start port monitoring control process, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 51 and the second starting port 52 is monitored, and if the game ball is won, the number of reserved balls is updated and the special symbol lottery is related. Random number storage, pre-reading notice effect judgment, command request for the number of symbol storage, etc. are performed in order.

Next, the special symbol control process is executed (S65). In this special symbol control process, as a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, the special symbol change start process (S420) and the special symbol change process (S430), which will be described in detail later, are performed according to the value of the special symbol game status. ), Processing during special symbol stop symbol display (S440), and the like are executed.

Next, the special electric accessory control process is executed (S66). In this process, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", the operation start and end of the special electric accessory 542 are set as the operation process related to the special electric accessory 542, and the operation is large. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the winning opening 54 are updated, the operation start setting of the probability variation function, the operation start setting of the variation time shortening function, the setting of the variation pattern selection state, and the like are executed in order.

Next, the large winning opening validity period setting process is executed (S67). In this large winning opening valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the large winning opening 54 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the large winning opening 54 is set as the determination result.

Next, the special symbol change start monitoring control process is executed (S68). In this special symbol change start monitoring control process, when the operation reserved sphere of the first special symbol or the second special symbol exists, the number of reserved spheres is digested by one, the command request of the symbol storage number, and the hit / fail determination of the special symbol are made. , Design determination of special symbol, determination of probability fluctuation function, determination of time reduction function, setting of operation pattern of special electric accessory, setting of demo production time, etc. are performed in order.

Next, the abnormality detection process is executed (S69). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information in the input process (S53), the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, the door / frame opening signal, etc. are inspected in order. , Determine whether the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, an effect control command (“error effect designation command”) including the error information is generated in order to request the effect control board 200 to display an error.

Next, the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In this ball entry passage time abnormality detection process, when the on signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or longer, the ball entry passage time abnormality is set and the effect control command (“error”) including the error information is set. In addition to requesting the effect specification command "), it also requests the output of a security signal to be output to the external terminal.

Next, the game state display process is executed (S71). In this game state display process, display data such as the number of times the special electric accessory 542 is continuously operated (the number of specified rounds), the number of balls on hold for normal symbols and special symbols, and the like are created. Further, display data for displaying the error state information detected by the abnormality detection process on the state indicator lamp of the main control board 100 is created.

Next, the LED output process is executed (S72). In this LED output process, the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S65), in order to display a special symbol and a normal symbol, display the number of reserved balls, the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated, display an error, and the like. Display data created by abnormality detection processing (S69), game status display processing (S71), etc. can be used for each special symbol display device 71, 72, normal symbol display device 75, each special symbol hold lamp 73, 74, and normal figure hold. The data is output to the lamp 76, the status indicator lamp of the main control board 100, and the like, and the display on these various display devices is initialized.

Next, the firing control signal output process is executed (S73). In this launch control signal output process, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a short-circuit power supply abnormality is not detected, a launch permission signal is output to the payout control board 400 and the game ball is allowed to be launched. do. On the other hand, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a short-circuit power supply abnormality is detected, a launch prohibition signal is output to the payout control board 400 to prohibit the launch of the game ball.

Next, the solenoid output process is executed (S74). In this solenoid output process, the normal symbol control process (S62) and the special electric accessory control process (S66) were acquired in order to operate each electric accessory 542. Based on the control data, an excitation signal is output to each electric accessory solenoid 623, 643.

Next, the effect control command transmission process is executed (S75). In this effect control command transmission process, the effect control command specified by the pointer is read from the effect control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage means 180 in the above process, and this effect is produced. A control command is transmitted to the effect control board 200.

Next, the external information output process is executed (S76). In this external information output processing, the game information related to the game machine PM is output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external information terminal board 600. Examples of the external information signal include a prize ball signal, a door frame opening signal, a magnetic sensor abnormality signal, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormality sensor detection (ball entry passage time abnormality, etc.) signal, a big hit signal, and a continuous villa signal. There is a symbol confirmation signal and so on.

Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main CPU 101 is set to the interrupt enabled state (S77). As a result, the main control side timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process, and the main control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

When the main control board 100 detects a power outage (a decrease in the supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold value) during the main control side main processing or interrupt processing, a non-masqueradable interrupt is generated and the power outage confirmation flag is turned on. do. Then, after returning to the original processing, the above-mentioned power-off processing (S26 to S32) is executed.

≪Winning monitoring process≫
Next, the winning monitoring process (S59) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the details of the winning monitoring process (S59).

First, the first start port switch input process is executed (S101). In the first start port switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port switch 511 is input. When the detection signal from the first starting port switch 511 is input, the first starting port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the first starting port 51 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time as storing, a first start opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the first start port switch 511, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Subsequently, the second start port switch input process is executed (S102). In the second start port switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second start port switch 521 is input. When the detection signal from the second starting port switch 521 is input, the second starting port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the second starting port 52 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time as storing, a second start opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the second start port switch 521, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Next, the operation gate switch input process is executed (S103). In the actuated gate switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the actuated gate switch 531 is input. When the detection signal from the operating gate switch 531 is input, the operating gate winning data indicating that the game ball has passed through the operating gate 53 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and the operating gate winning is won. A command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the operation gate switch 531, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Subsequently, the combined operation gate switch input process is executed (S104). In the combination operation gate switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the combination operation gate switches 911 and 921 is input. When the detection signal from the combination operation gate switch 911, 921 is input, the combination operation gate winning data indicating that the game ball has passed the combination operation gate 911, 921 is stored in the winning information of the main information storage means 180. Along with temporarily storing in the area (turning on the combination operation gate passing flag), a combination operation gate winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the combined operation gate switch 911, 921, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Subsequently, the large winning opening switch input process is executed (S105). In the big winning opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the big winning opening switch 541 is input. When the detection signal from the large winning opening switch 541 is input, the large winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the large winning opening 54 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. , A large winning opening winning command is generated, and this is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the large winning opening switch 541, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Subsequently, the general winning opening switch process is executed (S106). In the general winning opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the general winning opening switch 611 is input. When the detection signal from the general winning opening switch 611 is input, the general winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 61 to 63 is temporarily stored in the winning data storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, a general winning opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the general winning opening switch 611, the winning monitoring process this time is terminated.

≪Special design game processing≫
Next, a series of processes related to the special symbol game in the timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described. The processes related to the special symbol game include the above-mentioned start port monitoring control process (S64), special symbol control process (S65), special electric accessory control process (S66), special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68), and the like. Applies to.

(Starting port monitoring control processing)
First, the start port monitoring control process (S64) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the details of the start port monitoring control process (S64).

First, it is determined whether or not the winning of the game to the first starting port 51 is detected (S201). When the winning of the first starting port 51 is detected (S201: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of pending balls of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit of 4 (S202).

When the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is less than 4 (S202: YES), the lottery random value related to the first special symbol game is a random value per special symbol, a random value per special symbol, or a special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random value is acquired, and each random value is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the ball entry order (S203). Then, as an update of the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol, the value of the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is added by 1 (S204), and the winning check of the first starting port 51 is completed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the winning of the game to the second starting port 52 is detected (S205). When the winning of the second starting port 52 is detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit of 4 (S206). When the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is less than 4 (S206: YES), the lottery random value related to the second special symbol game is a random value per special symbol, a random value per special symbol, or a special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random value is acquired, and each random value is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the ball entry order (S207). Then, as an update of the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol, the value of the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is added by 1 (S208), and the winning check of the second starting port 52 is completed.

Subsequently, whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been updated, that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been added in S204 or S208. (S209). When the number of operation-reserved balls is updated (S209: YES), a symbol storage number command including information on the number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and this is used as the main information storage means. It is stored in the command storage area of 180 (S210).

Next, the state of the gaming machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is the pre-determination timing (S211). In the case of the pre-judgment timing (S211: YES), in order to generate pre-reading judgment information based on various random numbers acquired at the time of winning the start opening, a special symbol hit disorder is generated from the hit random number buffer (reserved n storage area or register, etc.). A numerical value is read out and a pre-determination of success or failure is performed (S212). Then, a pass / fail pre-determination command including the information of the pre-determination result (pre-determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S213).

Further, the symbol random number value per special symbol is read from the hit symbol random number buffer, and the symbol pre-determination is performed (S214). Then, a symbol pre-determination command including the information of the pre-determination result (symbol pre-determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S215). Further, the special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the variation pattern random number buffer, and the variation pattern pre-determination is performed (S216). Then, a variation pattern advance determination command including the information of the advance determination result (variation pattern advance determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S217).

(Special symbol change start monitoring control processing)
Next, the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68).

In this special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68), the special symbol change start monitoring process described later is performed on the special symbol side of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that satisfies the change start condition. (S305, S309) is executed. When both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the fluctuation start condition, as described above, the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol ( S305, S309) are executed in parallel.

First, it is determined whether or not a big hit or a small hit is in progress (S301). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is waiting for fluctuation, that is, whether or not the first special symbol game status is "00H (waiting for fluctuation)" (S302). When the first special symbol is waiting for change (S302: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is "0" (S303). When the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol is not "0" (S303: NO), that is, when the operation holding ball of the first special symbol exists, the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied. After setting the address of the 1st special symbol change start monitoring table (the address of various tables used in the subsequent processing and the address of the RAM storage area) (S305), the special symbol on the 1st special symbol side is set. The process shifts to the symbol change start monitoring process (S310).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is waiting for fluctuation, that is, whether or not the second special symbol game status is "00H (waiting for fluctuation)" (S306). When the second special symbol is waiting for change (S306: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is "0" (S307). When the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol is not "0" (S307: NO), that is, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists, the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. After setting the address of the second special symbol change start monitoring table (the address of various tables used in the subsequent processing and the address of the RAM storage area) (S308), the special symbol on the first special symbol side is set. The process shifts to the symbol change start monitoring process (S309). Details of the special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309) will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

If both the first special symbol and the second special symbol change start conditions are not satisfied (S301: YES, S302: NO, S306: NO, S307: YES), the special symbol change start monitoring process (S305). , S309) is skipped.

(Special symbol change start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309).

In this special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309), the change start of this time is started with reference to the first special symbol change start monitoring table or the second special symbol change start monitoring table set in S304 or S308 described above. The processing on the target special symbol side will be executed, but since the processing method is the same for the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, the processing method on the first special symbol side is the same except for special cases. It will be described collectively without distinguishing whether it is a process or a process on the second special symbol side.

First, the number of pending balls on the special symbol side, which is the target of the start of this fluctuation, is subtracted by 1 (S311). Then, a symbol storage number command including information on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after subtraction is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S312). Subsequently, the special symbol hold storage area on the special symbol side that is the target of the current fluctuation start is accessed, and the random value per special symbol and the special symbol per special symbol stored in the earliest reserved storage area (hold 1 storage area). The symbol random value and the special symbol variation pattern random value are read out in order, and these random values are used for the special symbol hit / fail determination process (S320), the symbol determination process (S330), and the variation pattern selection process (S423) described later. It is transferred to the special symbol hit / miss determination area, the special symbol symbol determination area, and the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S313). Further, as the update of the reserved storage area, the reserved ball information stored in the reserved 2 storage area to the reserved 4 storage area is shifted to the lower reserved storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area is cleared to zero (S314).

Subsequently, the special symbol winning / failing determination process is executed (S320). In the special symbol winning / failing determination process (S320), first, the special symbol winning / failing lottery table is acquired. At this time, if the gaming state is the special symbol probability change state, the high-probability winning / losing lottery table is acquired, and if the gaming state is the normal state, the low-probability winning / losing lottery table is acquired. Next, a random number value per special symbol is read from the special symbol hit / miss determination area of the main information storage means 180. Then, with reference to the special symbol winning / failing lottery table, the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is executed based on the random number value per special symbol. Further, the values corresponding to the hit / fail determination result (big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, loss data “00H”) are stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180.

Subsequently, the symbol determination process is executed (S330). In the symbol determination process (S330), the stop symbol and the character effect number (variable additional symbol information) of the special symbol are determined according to the result of the hit / fail determination. Then, the stop symbol (symbol group) and the character effect number of the special symbol determined this time are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage means 180. The character effect number is the type of the determined stop symbol (symbol group) and the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the normal symbol (probability change on of the special symbol / probability change off of the special symbol / probability change on of the normal symbol). / Determined based on the combination with (4 patterns of probability variation off of ordinary symbols). If the result of the hit / fail determination is wrong, the character effect number "0" is determined.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol corresponds to a small hit (S341), and whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol corresponds to a big hit (S342). If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a small hit (S341: YES), the process proceeds to S349, and if the result of the pass / fail judgment of the special symbol is incorrect (S341: NO, S342: NO), the result is S351. Transition.

When the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is a big hit (S341: NO, S342: YES), it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination data of the other special symbol is the big hit data (big hit data "55H") ( S343). When the hit / fail judgment data of the other special symbol is the jackpot data (S343: YES), the result of the hit / miss judgment of the special symbol derived in S320 is "missing" from "big hit" in order to prohibit duplication of the jackpot. And shift to S351.

Next, based on the type of symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 above and the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the number of probability fluctuations is determined as the number of times the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated after the end of the big hit game. (S345). Further, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 above and the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the number of times the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is activated after the end of the big hit game is the number of times the fluctuation time is shortened. Is determined (S346). Further, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 and the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the number of easy ball entry states is determined as the number of times the electric chew support function is activated after the big hit game is completed. (S347). This determination result (number of probability fluctuations, number of fluctuation time reductions, number of easy ball entry states) is stored in the time reduction number storage area and the ball entry easy state number storage area of the main information storage means 180. Subsequently, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330, the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542 during the big hit game (round game) is set (S348). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game, the opening pattern (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in each round, and the like are set.

Next, based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330 and the current gaming state, the variation pattern selection state after the end of the big hit game or after the small hit game is set (S349). Subsequently, based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330, the demo production time (hit start demo time and hit end demo time) of the special game (big hit game or small hit game) is set (S350). Next, the special symbol hit / miss determination area and the special symbol symbol determination area of the main information storage means 180 used in the above-mentioned special symbol hit / miss determination process (S320) and symbol determination process (S330) are cleared (S351). Then, the special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be changed this time is changed from "00H (standby)" to "01H (start of change)" (S352).

(Special symbol control processing)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control process (S65).

First, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 542 is not operating, that is, whether or not the special electric accessory game status is "00H (waiting for hit)" (S401). When the special electric accessory 542 is not operating (S401: YES), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol game status is "00H (standby)" (S402). When the first special symbol game status is not "00H (waiting)" (S402: YES), the first special symbol control table (used in the subsequent processes) is used to execute the process related to the first special symbol. The address of each table and the address of the RAM storage area) are set (S403), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404). On the other hand, when the first special symbol game status is "00H (waiting)" (S402: NO), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol game status is "00H (waiting)" (S405). ). When the second special symbol game status is not "00H (waiting)" (S405: YES), the second special symbol control table (used in the subsequent processes) is used to execute the process related to the second special symbol. The address of various tables and the address of the RAM storage area) are set (S406), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S407).

In the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407), the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in the above-mentioned S403 or S406 is used, and the special symbol subject to the current variation is used. The processing on the side will be executed, but since the processing method is the same for the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, unless there is a special case, is it the processing on the first special symbol side? It will be described collectively without distinguishing whether it is the processing on the second special symbol side. Details of this special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol control general-purpose processing)
Subsequently, the special symbol control general-purpose processing is executed (S404, S407). Here, FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407).

In this special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407), branch processing (S411 to S414) for shifting to processing according to the value of the special symbol game status ("01H", "02H", "03H") is executed. do. First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status on the special symbol side that is the target of this change is not 0 (S411). When the special symbol game status is not "00H" (S411: YES), it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "01H (variation start)" (S412). When the special symbol game status is "01H" (S412: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol change start process (S420). The details of this special symbol change start processing (S420) will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. On the other hand, if NO in S412, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "02H (during fluctuation)" (S413). When the special symbol game status is "02H" (S413: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol changing process (S430). The details of this special symbol change processing (S430) will be described later with reference to FIG. 32. If NO in S413, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "03H (stop symbol is being displayed)" (S414). When the special symbol game status is "03H" (S414: YES), the process proceeds to the process of displaying the special symbol stop symbol (S440). The details of this special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 to 34.

(Special symbol change start processing)
Next, the special symbol change start processing (S420) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol change start processing (S420).

First, a special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the winning / failing lottery, the variation pattern selection state, and the like (S421). Subsequently, the special symbol variation pattern random value is read out from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S422). Then, with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random value (S423).

Next, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected this time is set (S424). Then, as a setting for starting the variation of the special symbol, the variation time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S425), and the variation start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (S426). As the variation start command, in order to start the symbol variation effect in the effect display device 70, a communication inspection command, a variation addition symbol information specification command, a variation pattern specification command, and a symbol specification command are generated in order, and these are used as the main information storage means. Stored in the command storage area of 180.

Subsequently, the content of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 used for determining the variation pattern is cleared (S427). Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "01H (start of fluctuation)" to "02H (during fluctuation)" (S428).

(Processing during special symbol change)
Next, the processing during special symbol change (S430) will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol changing process (S430).

First, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation interruption flag is on (S430). The "fluctuation interruption flag" is a flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed as the other special symbol game. When the fluctuation interruption flag is off (S430: NO), that is, when the small hit game is not being executed as the other special symbol game, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed, so that the changing display pattern number switching process is performed. Execute (S431). In this variable display pattern number switching process (S431), display pattern number data during variable display or stop display of a special symbol is generated at predetermined switching times. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in the LED output process (S73) in order to display the special symbol in a variable manner or a definite display.

On the other hand, when the changing flag is on (S430: YES), that is, when the small hit game is being executed as the other special symbol game, the fluctuation display of the special symbol to be processed is interrupted, so that the fluctuation is interrupted. The middle display pattern number switching process is executed (S432). In this variable display pattern number switching process (S432), display pattern number data during interruption of the variable display of the special symbol is generated at each predetermined switching time. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in the LED output process (S73) in order to interrupt the variable display of the special symbol.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (time-out)", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has expired (S433). When the variation time of the special symbol ends (S433: YES), the stop symbol of the special symbol to be definitely displayed is set in the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 (S434).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination data of the special symbol set in S320 is the jackpot data (S435). When the hit / fail determination data is the jackpot data (S435: YES), it is determined whether or not the other special symbol is in the variable display (S436). When the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S436: YES), the variable display of the other special symbol is forced even before the variable time of the other special symbol reaches the specified variable time. (S437). That is, the other missed or small hit variation display is forcibly stopped at the missed symbol. Subsequently, a fluctuation stop command for instructing the effect control board 200 to confirm and display the decorative symbol is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S438).

Next, "500 (ms)" is stored as the fixed display time in the special symbol game timer (S439). The "fixed display time" is the time for deterministically stopping and displaying the stopped symbol when the special symbol is stopped fluctuating. Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "02H (during change)" to "03H (during stop symbol display)" (S440).

(Processing during special symbol stop symbol display)
Next, the processing during display of the special symbol stop symbol (S440) will be described. 33 to 34 are flowcharts showing the details of the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440).

First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (time-out)", that is, whether or not the final display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has expired (S441). Here, when the final display time of the special symbol ends (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is changed from "03H (stop symbol display)" to "00H (standby)" (S442).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 is the jackpot data “55H” (S443). When the hit / fail determination data is jackpot data (S443: YES), the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is stopped (S444), the operation of the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is stopped (S445), and the electric chew support function is activated. Stop (S446) in order. Specifically, "00H (off)" is set in the probability variation flag, and "00H" is set in the probability fluctuation count counter, the fluctuation time shortening count counter, and the ball entry easy state count counter to clear zero.

Next, as the start demo setting process of the special game, the start demo display time is set and an effect control command (big hit start demo command) instructing the start of the start demo effect is generated (S447). Subsequently, the number of executions of the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state count counter) is cleared to zero (S448). In addition, the special electric accessory game status is changed from "00H (waiting state)" to "01H (special game)" (S449). Then, in order to clear the contents of the hit / fail determination flag, "00H" is set (S450).

On the other hand, when the hit / fail determination data is not the jackpot data (S443: NO), it is determined whether or not the probability variation function of the special symbol is operating (S451). When the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is operating (S451: YES), the probability fluctuation counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the digestion of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time (step S452). .. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation number counter is zero (step S453). When the probability fluctuation number counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is stopped (S454). If the probability fluctuation counter after subtraction is not zero (S453: NO), S454 is skipped and the process proceeds to S455.

Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is operating (S455). When the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is operating (S455: YES), the time reduction counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the digestion of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time (step S456). .. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the time reduction counter is zero (step S457). When the time reduction counter is zero (S457: YES), it is assumed that the number of ends of the special symbol time reduction state has been reached, and the operation of the fluctuation time reduction function of the special symbol is stopped (S458). If the time reduction counter after subtraction is not zero (S457: NO), S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S459.

Next, it is determined whether or not the electric chew support function is operating (S459). When the electric chew support function is operating (S459: YES), the counter for the number of easy entry states of the main information storage means 180 is subtracted by 1 as the digestion of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time (step S460). .. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the ball entry easy state count counter is zero (step S461). When the number of times of easy entry state counter is zero (S461: YES), it is assumed that the number of times of the end of easy entry state has been reached, and the operation of the electric chew support function is stopped (S462). If the counter for the number of easy entry states after subtraction is not zero (S461: NO), S462 is skipped and the process proceeds to S463.

Next, the fluctuation pattern selection state count counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 (S463). Then, the fluctuation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, the number of times of the variation pattern selection state of the main information storage means 180 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached the preset number of ends, and the number of ends is determined. If it has been reached, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state specified next. On the other hand, if the number of ends has not been reached, the current fluctuation pattern selection state is maintained.

Next, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the current game state information and fluctuation pattern selection state information updated in S451 to S464 is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Store in (S465). The effect control board 200 side sets and updates the effect mode based on the information of the game state designation command.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the small hit data "33H" is stored in the special symbol determination flag (S466). When the small hit data is stored (S466: YES), it is determined whether or not the other special symbol is in the variable display (S467). When the other special symbol is in the variable display (S467: YES), the variable interruption flag set in the main information storage means 180 is turned on (S468). That is, when the small hit game is executed for the special symbol to be processed, the variation interruption flag is turned on in order to interrupt the variation display of the other special symbol. If the other special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S467: NO), S468 is skipped.

Next, as the start demo setting process of the small hit game, the start demo display time is set and an effect control command (small hit start demo command) instructing the start of the start demo effect is generated (S469). Subsequently, the special electric accessory game status is changed from "00H (waiting for hit)" to "02H (small hit game)" (S470). Then, "00H" is set in order to clear the contents of the hit / fail determination flag of the special symbol (S471).

On the other hand, when the small hit data "33H" is not stored in the special symbol determination flag (S466: NO), that is, when the special symbol determination flag contains the deviation data "00H", S467 to S471 are set. skip. When the special symbol determination flag is out-of-order data, the processing for clearing the content of the flag is not performed because "00H" is originally stored as out-of-order data.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
Next, the special electric accessory control process (S66) will be described. 35 to 37 are flowcharts showing the details of the electric accessory control process (S66).

First, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory game status is "01H (special game)" (S501). When the special electric accessory game status is "01H" (S501: YES), it is determined whether or not the combination operation gate passage flag is on (S502). When the combination operation gate passage flag is on (S502: YES), the special game process is executed in the subsequent processes. In this special game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 542 is in operation (S503). When the special electric accessory 542 is not operating (S503: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 (S504). The operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 is the timing at which the operation of the special electric accessory 542 is started in each round game.

When it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 (S504: YES), an effect control command (round effect designation command) is generated to start the round effect, and this is stored as a command of the main information storage means 180. Store in the area (S505). In addition, on the effect control board 200 side, based on the information of this round effect designation command (information such as the current number of rounds), the round effect corresponding to each round game during the special game is executed. Then, the operation of the special electric accessory 542 is started (S506), and the processes S507 to S511 are executed as the processes during the operation of the special electric accessory 542.

As a process during operation of the special electric accessory 542, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a predetermined count number (maximum number of winnings) in the large winning opening 54 (S507), and the operating time of the special electric accessory 542 is determined. It is determined whether or not (opening time) has elapsed (S508). At this time, if the game ball wins only the specified count number (maximum number of winnings) in the large winning opening 54 (S507: YES) or the operating time of the special electric accessory 542 has elapsed (S508: YES), it is special. The operation of the electric accessory 542 is stopped (S509). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 has reached a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (S510). When the number of continuous operations has not reached the specified number of rounds (S510: NO), the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 is incremented by 1 (S511).

On the other hand, when the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 has reached the specified number of rounds (S510: YES), the process proceeds to S512 and the end demo display time is set as the hit end demo setting process for the special game. At the same time, an effect control command (big hit end demo command) for instructing the start of the end demo effect is generated (S512).

Next, the probability fluctuation count information determined in S345 is stored in the probability fluctuation counter (S513). Further, the fluctuation time reduction count information information determined in S346 is stored in the fluctuation time reduction counter (S514). Further, the information on the number of easy-to-enter states determined in S347 is stored in the counter for the number of easy-to-enter states (S515).

Subsequently, with reference to the type (big hit type) of the symbol group determined in S340, it is determined whether or not the operation of the condition device is the operation by the specific symbol (so-called probabilistic symbol) (S516). When the condition device is operated by a specific symbol (S516: YES), the operation time data "64H" is stored in the probability fluctuation number counter of the main information storage means 180, and the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is started. (S517). On the other hand, when the condition device is not operated by the specific symbol (S516: NO), the non-operating data "00H" is stored in the probability fluctuation number counter and S517 is skipped.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time shortening number information set in S514 is the fluctuation time shortening function operation data (data other than "00H") (S518). In the case of the fluctuation time shortening function operation data (S518: YES), the operation of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is started (S519). On the other hand, if it is not the fluctuation time shortening function operation data (S518: NO), S519 is skipped.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the ball entry easy state count information set in S515 is the electric chew support function operation data (data other than "00H") (S520). In the case of the electric chew support function operation data (S520: YES), the operation of the electric chew support function is started (S521 to S523). That is, the start of operation of the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol (S521), the start of the operation of the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (S522), and the start of the operation of the open extension function of the normal electric accessory 522 (S523) are executed in order. On the other hand, if it is not the electric chew support function operation data, S521 to S523 are skipped.

Then, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state determined in S349 (S524). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the game state information after the special game and the variation pattern selection state information set in S513 to S524 described above is generated, and this is used by the main information storage means 180. Store in the command storage area (S525). On the effect control board 200 side, the effect mode after the special game is set based on the information of the game state designation command. Then, the special electric accessory game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting state)" (S526).

On the other hand, if the special electric accessory game status is not "01H (special game)" (S501: NO), it shifts to S530 and is the special electric accessory game status "02H (small hit game)"? It is determined whether or not (S530). When the special electric accessory game status is "02H" (S530: YES), the small hit game process is executed in the subsequent processes.

In the small hit game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 542 is in operation (S531). When the special electric accessory 542 is not operating (S531: NO), the operation of the special electric accessory 542 is started (S532). On the other hand, when the special electric accessory 542 is in operation (S531: YES), S532 is skipped.

Subsequently, as a process during operation of the special electric accessory 542, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the maximum number of winnings in the large winning opening 54 (S533), and the operating time of the special electric accessory 542 (opening). It is determined whether or not the time) has elapsed (S534). At this time, if the game ball wins only the specified count number (maximum number of winnings) in the large winning opening 54 (S533: YES) or the operating time of the special electric accessory 542 has elapsed (S534: YES), it is special. The operation of the electric accessory 542 is stopped (S535).

Next, as the small hit game ends, the fluctuation interruption flag is turned off (S536). When this fluctuation interruption flag is turned off, the interruption state of the variation display of the other special symbol is released, and the variation display is restarted (related to the variation display by the special symbol game timer). Fluctuation time measurement is resumed).

Subsequently, as the end demo setting process of the small hit game, the end demo display time is set and an effect control command (small hit end demo command) instructing the start of the end demo effect is generated (S537). Then, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state determined in S347 (S538). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the variation pattern selection state information after the special game set in S537 is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (). S539). This game state designation command is used on the effect control board 200 side to determine the transition trigger of the effect mode, specify the effect mode of the transfer destination, and the like. Then, the special electric accessory game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting state)" (S540).

<Processing on the production control board side>
Next, the procedure of the operation processing in the effect control board 200 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 38 to 43. The processing on the effect control board 200 side is a reset start process (including the effect control side main process) that is executed when the sub-main CPU 201 is reset, such as after the power is turned on, and an effect control side timer interrupt that is activated at regular intervals. The lamp is activated when the processing, the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command activated by the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and the arrival of the predetermined occurrence time specified in the time schedule of the variable effect pattern. It is configured to include effect interrupt processing and transmission interrupt processing of image control commands that are activated at regular intervals.

In each interrupt process (exception process), a priority level indicating the priority when a plurality of interrupt processes occur is set. In this example, "Reset start processing by power reset: Top priority", "Reset start processing due to various abnormalities: Top priority" → "Reception interrupt processing of production control command: Level 7" → "WDT (when runaway is detected) The priority levels are ranked in the order of "reset start processing: level 3" → "image control command transmission interrupt processing: level 2" → "effect control side timer interrupt processing: level 1". The "reset start process due to various abnormalities" is, for example, DMA (Direct Memory) when the sub-main CPU 201 executes an illegal instruction, or when the sub-main CPU 201 tries to access an illegal area or an illegal method. Access) Starts when an error occurs during transfer. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned plurality of types of interrupt processing are illustrated, but in reality, other interrupt processing also exists.

In the main process on the effect control side, basically, the process is proceeded after setting either the state of prohibiting all interrupts or disabling interrupts other than the effect control command reception interrupt. Then, when the effect control side main process is in the interrupt enable state, each interrupt process is started in the form of interrupting the main process. In each interrupt process, when another interrupt process is requested (multiple interrupts occur) during the execution of the interrupt process, in principle, the interrupt process has a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed. The interrupt request is permitted, but the interrupt request is prohibited when the interrupt processing has a lower priority level than the interrupt processing being executed or the interrupt processing has the same priority level. That is, each interrupt process is processed in a state in which other interrupts having the same priority level or a lower priority level are disabled. Then, each interrupt process returns to the effect control side main process with all interrupts enabled. The priority order (priority level) of such an interrupt factor is defined by the register setting of the effect control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<< Reset start processing >>
First, the reset start process of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a reset start process of the effect control board 200. In this reset start process, it is started by any of the reset when the power is turned on, the reset caused by various abnormalities, and the reset caused by WDT (when runaway is detected), and after the security check of the sub-main CPU 201 is performed. , The program starts, and the processing after S601 is started.

First, as an initial setting required when the power is turned on, the start address is set as the initial value of the stack area in the stack pointer (S601). Then, all interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S602).

Subsequently, as a basic setting regarding hardware, an initial value is set in the built-in register provided in the sub-main CPU 201, and the I / O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Further, the memory area in the RAM 203 of the effect control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, the initial value is set for the variable with the initial value, and the variable without the initial value is initialized by clearing 0. Further, the sub-main CPU 201 appropriately expands the control program stored in the ROM 202 to the RAM 203.

Subsequently, interrupts other than the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command are prohibited (S605). Next, among various errors set in common for each model in advance, a process of setting the type of error to be valid for the model is performed (S606). Further, an extinguishing request is made to put all the effect lamps LP (frame lamp 10, board lamp 80) into the extinguished state (S607). Then, the watchdog timer is activated to monitor the runaway of the sub-main CPU 201 (S608).

Subsequently, the effect control side main process is executed as the main process of the game effect (S609). The details of this effect control side main process (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. When shifting to the main process on the effect control side in S609, it is usually impossible to return from the main process to the reset start process, but in the unlikely event that a bug in the program occurs, the process returns to this process. To transition to a small power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which the power consumption is reduced as compared with the normal operation.

<< Main processing on the production control side >>
Next, the effect control side main process (S609) of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the effect control side main process (S609).

First, an address (starting address where the program is expanded) for starting a check as to whether or not the control program is accurately expanded in the RAM 203 is acquired in the main process on the effect control side (S611). Subsequently, all interrupts are permitted (starting of various interrupt processes is permitted) (S612).

Next, the device initialization operation is executed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on (at the start of reset), and the operation of the movable accessory 24 is controlled by a device such as a motor or a solenoid. It is executed for the purpose of confirming the necessary location information. At the end of the initialization operation, the movable accessory 24 returns to the preset initial position (reference position).

Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared in order to restart the watchdog timer (S614). At this time, when the sub-main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, the watchdog timer is set by writing a predetermined clear word to the WDT clear register of the sub-main CPU 201 within the preset time-out time. It is cleared and restarted. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Subsequently, the input port check process is executed (S615). In this input port check process, the read of the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) in the port input / output process S912 in the timer interrupt process described later is monitored for each interrupt occurrence, and is monitored a plurality of times (for example, 4 times). When all the input port states are "1", the signal level is set to "1 (H level)", when all are "0", the signal level is set to "0 (L level)", and in other cases, the signal level is set. Do not change (this confirms the input signal).

Subsequently, the error effect management process is executed (S616). In this error effect management process, error effect by various devices is started based on the error effect pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S622). Further, in the error effect management process, an initial value (error effect time) is set in the error management timer to manage the progress of the error effect. This error management timer is subtracted and updated at a cycle of 16 ms in the error management timer update process (S920) of the effect control side timer interrupt process. Then, when the error management timer times out, the error effect is terminated.

Subsequently, the effect button monitoring control process is executed (S617). In this effect button monitoring control process, when the button advance notice effect is incorporated during the fluctuation of the symbol, the input state of the effect button 15 is monitored within a predetermined operation effective time, and the information regarding the input state of the effect button 15 is monitored. To hold.

Subsequently, the advance notice lottery management process is executed (S618). In this advance notice lottery management process, a advance notice effect pattern that defines the contents of the advance notice effect that occurs at each stage of the change process of the decorative pattern is generated according to the scenario of the change effect pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S620). It will be decided by lottery. The advance notice effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the advance notice effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. Further, an image control command for designating the advance notice effect pattern number on the image control board 300 side is generated, and this is set in the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260. At this time, when the accessory advance notice effect pattern is selected as the advance notice effect pattern, an accessory request is generated, and the drive pattern of the movable accessory 24 is specified in the subsequent device management process (S619). .. In this example, all of the plurality of types of notice effects (notice effect patterns) that occur within one variation of the decorative pattern are not drawn by lottery in one main loop process, but the efficiency of the main loop processing is improved. In order to make it happen, the lottery is performed over a plurality of main loop processes by dividing it into each time when the advance notice effect occurs (for example, the fluctuation start stage, the reach generation stage, and the fluctuation stop stage). At that time, for the advance notice effect that occurs at the start stage of the change of the decorative pattern, it is necessary to synchronize with the start of the change of the decorative pattern (the image control command is sent immediately), so the lottery is performed in the starting main loop process. It is supposed to do.

Next, the device management process is executed (S619). In this device management process, when there is an operation request (lamp request, accessory request) of various devices in the command analysis process (S620) described later, a plurality of types of pattern data (lamp pattern, drive pattern) stored in the ROM 203 are stored. ), The pattern data corresponding to the effect number (lamp effect number, character advance notice effect number) is specified, and the control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the effect lamp LP, the lamp data associated with each frame time (time required to update the image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In this example, the one-frame time corresponds to the time required for the one-frame drawing process when drawing at about 60 frames per second (= about 60 fps) on the effect display device 70. Similarly, in the drive pattern data of the movable accessory 24, the drive data associated with each interrupt cycle (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at regular intervals in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, and the operation of the target device is started. On the other hand, when all the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is completed in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, the effect lamp LP is turned off or the operation of the movable accessory 24 is stopped. , End control of the target device.

Subsequently, the command analysis process (S620) is executed. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if the effect control command is stored, this command is read and the read effect control command is read. The effect control process corresponding to the type of is executed. The details of this command analysis process (S620) will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

Then, it is determined whether or not the command analysis (analysis of the effect control command) is executed during the loop processing this time (S621). Immediately after command analysis (S621: YES), the process returns to S614 and the process proceeds to the next loop process. On the other hand, when the command analysis is not executed (S621: NO), that is, when the command buffer is empty, the effect lottery random number update process is executed until a predetermined time elapses (S622). In the present embodiment, the predetermined time is set to "16 ms", which is half the time of the minimum unit (32 ms) of the lamp LP switching control. In this effect lottery random number update process, various effect lottery random numbers such as pre-reading advance notice lottery random numbers, decorative symbol random numbers, variable effect pattern random numbers, and advance notice effect pattern random numbers are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis process (S622) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the details of the command analysis process (S622). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the effect corresponding to the type of the stored effect control command is monitored. Execute control processing.

First, it is determined whether or not the game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S631). When the game state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process proceeds to the effect state transition process (S632). In the effect state transition process (S632), a process of transitioning the effect mode is executed based on the game state information and the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hold-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S633). Here, the hold-related commands include a symbol storage number command and a pre-determination command. When this hold-related command is stored (S633: YES), the process proceeds to the hold information management process (S634). In this hold information management process (S634), the symbol storage number command or the advance determination command is read from the sub-main information storage means 260, the look-ahead determination is executed based on the information of the advance determination result, and the hold image of the effect display device 70 is executed. A process for updating the number of reserved images displayed on the display unit 710 and the display mode (display color, etc.) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S635). Here, the symbol fluctuation-related commands include a fluctuation start command and a fluctuation stop command. When the symbol variation-related command is stored (step S635: YES), the process proceeds to the variation effect content determination process (S636). In this variation effect content determination process (S636), if the received symbol variation-related command is a variation start command, a process for starting the variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed, and the received symbol variation-related command stops variation. If it is a command, the process for ending the variation effect of the decorative pattern is executed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the jackpot effect-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S637). Here, the jackpot effect-related commands include a jackpot start demo effect command, a round effect designation command, and a jackpot end demo effect command. When the jackpot effect related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process proceeds to the jackpot effect content determination process (S638). In this jackpot effect content determination process (S638), a process for executing a start demo effect, a round effect, and an end demo effect is performed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a command related to the small hit effect is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S639). Here, the small hit effect-related commands include a small hit start demo effect command and a small hit end demo effect command. When the command related to the small hit effect is stored (step S639: YES), the process proceeds to the small hit effect content determination process (S640). In this small hit effect content determination process (S640), a process for executing a small hit start demo effect and a small hit end demo effect is performed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-information storage means 280 (S641). When this error effect specification command is stored (S641: YES), the process proceeds to the error effect content determination process (S642). In this error effect content determination process (S642), an error effect specification command is read from the sub-information storage means 280, and an error effect pattern for notifying the error state by lighting the effect lamp LP, the sound of the speaker 11, or the like is determined. ..

If the effect control command is not stored in the command storage area of the sub-information storage means 280 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S639: NO, S641: NO), do nothing. The command analysis process is terminated.

<< Receive interrupt processing of production control commands >>
Next, the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command. As described above, the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command is started when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various effect control commands are acquired in this interrupt processing. It has become like. The effect control command is configured to include 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data, and is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 in the order of MODE data and EVENT data. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the MODE data will be referred to as a “first command”, and the EVENT data will be referred to as a “second command”.

First, when an interrupt based on the strobe signal from the main control board 100 occurs, it is determined whether or not the input value of the effect control command is fixed (S901). Specifically, the input value is fixed when the command data is read up to 5 times and the same value is read twice in succession. This is because the reading of the effect control command may fail due to noise or the like, and the input value is not fixed until the same value is read twice in succession.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether it is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S902). When the command received this time is the first command (S902: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in the temporary area (S903). Then, the effect lottery random number is acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the effect lottery random number storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S904). It should be noted that the time when the effect lottery random number is acquired is the time when the effect control command is received, that is, the effect control command is transmitted at a physically irregular timing such as when the game ball starts winning a prize or when the special symbol changes. Therefore, by taking this as an opportunity, it is necessary to prevent periodicity in the acquisition time. By making the acquisition time of the random number of the effect lottery irregular in this way, inconveniences such as the same effect being unnaturally and repeatedly selected in various effect lottery are less likely to occur.

On the other hand, when the command received this time is the second command (S902: NO), it is determined whether or not the first command has already been received (S905). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect control command is received in the order of the first command (MODE) → the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether there is a contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands. If there is no contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands (S905: YES), the address indicated by the write pointer (pointer for writing) is acquired (S906). Subsequently, the first command and the second command are stored in the effect control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub-main information storage means 260 according to the address indicated by the write pointer (S907). The saved command data is read out in the command analysis process (S620) in the main process, and the effect control process corresponding to the type of the effect control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S908). Further, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in S903 is cleared (S909). Then, the effect control command reception interrupt process is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

<< Timer interrupt processing on the production control side >>
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the effect control side will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the effect control side timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is activated by a clock pulse at regular time intervals and is executed in the form of interrupting the above-mentioned effect control side main process.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the sub-main CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 203, and then the processes after S911 are sequentially executed. In this timer interrupt process, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher, such as an effect control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100 and a watchdog timer interrupt, are permitted (S911).

Subsequently, the port input / output process is executed (S912). In this port input / output processing, input processing and output processing of port data in the I / O port circuit 204 are performed. In the input process, various signals input to the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 are read out and output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port).

Subsequently, the device control data output process is executed (S913). In this device control data output process, the drive data for a predetermined time is read from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (S619) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. When the drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in this device control data output process, the drive data is switched every interrupt cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

Next, the effect timer update process is executed (S914). In this effect timer update process, the values of various effect timers used for the effect operation control are subtracted and updated by an interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The effect timer includes a timer for managing the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol, a timer for managing the occurrence timing of the advance notice effect, and the like. The effect timer manages the time schedule in the variable effect pattern, and manages the time such as the drive timing of the movable accessory 24 and the lighting timing of the effect lamp LP on the time axis. The effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (S913) and the lamp data update process (S917) in the effect control timer interrupt process.

Subsequently, the button control timer update process is executed (S915). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the operation effective time of the effect button 15 is subtracted and updated by the interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The operation effective time is a time during which the operation input of the effect button 15 is effective.

Subsequently, the task control counter update process is executed (S916). In this task control counter update process, the task counter values (“0” to “15”) are updated for each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is "0" to "14", it is incremented by 1, and if the value of the task counter becomes "15", it is returned to "0". That is, this task counter can have a circulation cycle of 16 ms. Then, various tasks (task processing) are assigned according to the value of the task counter updated this time, and the lamp control task (lamp data update processing of S917) and runaway monitoring are assigned according to the value of the task counter. Each process such as a task (image CPU runaway monitoring process of S9189) and an error management task (error management timer update process of S919) is executed. In this example, one of the task counter values ("0" to "15") is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values that are 8 ms apart from each other) are for runaway monitoring. It is assigned to a task and one other value is assigned to the error management task (the description of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the reason why the circulation cycle of the task counter is set to 16 ms is to match with the minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP. The minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, and the synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect is realized.

Subsequently, the lamp data update process is executed (S917). In this lamp data update process, lamp data for a predetermined time is read out from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S621) or the like and set. The lamp data set in this process is data indicating lighting control for 16 ms, which is the minimum unit of switching control of the effect lamp LP. When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. This lamp data output processing is configured as a serial communication interrupt processing, and is realized by sequentially writing the lamp data to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serially converts the lamp data of the transmission buffer in 1-byte units and outputs each bit to the lamp connection board 91 in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, so that all the lamp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in this lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every one frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and the lamp data is output to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer.

Subsequently, the image CPU runaway monitoring process is executed (S918). In this image CPU runaway monitoring process, the toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and when the toggle signal does not change continuously for 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames), the image control board 300 is used. It is determined that the sub-sub CPU 301 of the above is out of control, and a reset signal is transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300. As a result, the image control board 300 side executes a predetermined reset process when the reset state of the sub-sub CPU 301 occurs. The toggle signal is a signal having a waveform in which H level / L level is alternately repeated every frame time.

Next, the error management timer process is executed (S919). In this error management timer process, the value of the error effect timer for managing the error effect time set in the error effect management process (S616) is subtracted and updated. Then, after making all interrupts permitted and restoring the contents of the saved register, the timer interrupt process on the effect control side is terminated and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt occurred.

<< Transmission interrupt processing of image control commands >>
Next, the transmission interrupt processing of the image control command will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the transmission interrupt processing of the image control command. The transmission interrupt process of this image control command occurs at predetermined fixed intervals (500 μs).

In the transmission interrupt process of this image control command, first, the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 is checked (S931). Subsequently, a read pointer is acquired in the image control command buffer (S932). Next, it is determined whether or not the image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (S933). Whether or not the image control command is stored can be confirmed by, for example, the read pointer and the write pointer. If the read pointer and the write pointer match, the image control command is not stored. When the image control command is stored (S933: YES), the image control command is read from the area pointed to by the read pointer (S934). This read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit designated as the output destination (S935). As a result, the image control command is serially transmitted from the serial port to the image control board 300. Next, the command data (command data transmitted in S935) is cleared (S936). Subsequently, the read pointer is incremented by 1 and updated (S937). Then, the transmission interrupt process of the image control command is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

The main effects achieved in this embodiment can be summarized as follows.

According to the present embodiment, within the limited period (within 4 rotations) immediately after the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state, the variation pattern selection state is set to the limited frequency selection state, and the variation pattern selection state is normally selected. By relatively increasing the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol as compared with the case of the state, even if the operation holding ball of the second special symbol generated during the advantageous gaming state is digested during the normal gaming state. Since the variation display of the second special symbol is no longer peculiar (variation display for an extremely long time, etc.), the player feels uncomfortable or uncomfortable with respect to the gaming situation immediately after the transition to the normal gaming state. It can be difficult to hold, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the winning / failing determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the entry probability (transition probability) into the latent probability changing gaming state is the same regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. On the other hand, when the result of the winning / failing judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, the probability of entering the latent probability changing gaming state (transition probability) can be different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. The conditions for transitioning to the latent probability change game state (small hit RUSH mode) as the most advantageous game state are made different between the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, and until the most advantageous game state is reached. Since it is possible to give variations to the transition method of the game state, it is possible to create a complicated and diverse game playability that has never existed in the past, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the external information signal is transmitted from the external information terminal plate 600 not when the condition device is activated but when the accessory continuous operating device is activated. By outputting (big hit signal, signal during consecutive villas) to an external device, even if an irregular event such as a big hit of the second special symbol (so-called accident hit) occurs in this normal game state, even if it occurs. In the waiting state of the big hit game from the time the condition device is activated until the game ball passes through the winning combination operation gates 91 and 92, this big hit is generated only by a specific player depending on the display result of the external device (data display device). Since it is possible to avoid the situation of being exposed to the game, the fairness of the game can be ensured, and as a result, the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the gaming state in which the variation display of the first special symbol is the main body of the game, the symbol confirmation signal is not output when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, in the gaming state in which the variation display of the second special symbol is the main game, the first is configured so that the symbol confirmation signal is not output when the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Of the variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol, the number of variable displays based on the start prize that occurred accidentally (irregularly) in the game state during the current stay is excluded, and the game state during the current stay is used. Since only the number of valid fluctuation displays originally intended can be extracted, the operating status of the gaming machine can be properly managed by the hall computer, and the true operating status of the gaming machine can be managed by the data display. It is possible to notify a person and use it as a judgment material for selecting a gaming machine or as reference information for a game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, while the small hit RUSH mode is being executed, the variation display of the big hit of the first special symbol is executed based on the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol being a big hit (so-called accident hit). If this is the case, the game is switched to a variable effect indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit until the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly terminated (that is, the game is switched to the variable effect indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit. Until the person recognizes the end of the small hit RUSH mode), since it can be suggested or notified only that the small hit RUSH mode (latent probability variation game state) continues, the notification indicating the continuation or termination of the small hit RUSH mode. It is possible to prevent a notification effect that disappoints the player's expectations, such as a discrepancy between the content and the actual game result, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

<Modification 1 of the first embodiment>
FIG. 44 is a transition diagram of the gaming state and the effect mode in the modified example of the first embodiment. In the above embodiment, the operation of the second special symbol generated during the advantageous gaming state within the limited period immediately after the transition from the advantageous gaming state (time saving gaming state, latent probability changing gaming state, probability changing gaming state) to the normal gaming state. A special mode is set for digesting the reserved ball at high speed, but in this modified example, the execution probability of a highly rare specific effect is set within a predetermined period immediately after the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state. A special mode that is set relatively high compared to other production modes (normal mode) is set. In addition, in the predetermined period in this modification, "20 times" is set as the number of times of variation display of the special symbol.

In this modification, the specific effect is a rare premier effect in which the appearance rate is relatively low and the jackpot expectation is relatively high. The premier production is a production in which the jackpot winning is guaranteed in the variable display (a highly rare production in which the jackpot expectation is set to 100%). In this modification, as the above-mentioned specific effect, a specific premier effect (referred to as "specific premier effect") is targeted among a plurality of types of premier effects. The specific premier effect is, for example, a premier lamp effect in which a frame lamp 10 provided on the glass frame 5 lights up in rainbow colors to notify a big hit winner, or a premier image (for example, a premiere) on the screen of the effect display device 70. The premier notice production that notifies the big hit winning by the appearance of the character) corresponds to this. The specific premier effect in this modification is configured as a big hit confirmation effect in which the big hit expectation is set to 100%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit expectation is set to less than 100%. It may be configured as a high-expectation effect (extreme heat effect).

When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the specific premier effect can be executed even when staying in another effect mode (normal mode) other than the special mode. However, it is set so that the execution probability of the specific premier effect is higher when staying in the special mode than when staying in the normal mode. That is, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the execution probability of the specific premier effect is set to be different depending on the effect mode during the stay. The reason for setting such a special mode is that the advantageous gaming state having a high advantage for the player such as the latent probability changing gaming state ends and falls to the normal gaming state having a low advantage for the player. However, by shifting to a special mode in which the execution probability of the highly rare premier production has been improved, it is possible to generate a premier production that can only be seen rarely during the period of stay in this special mode. This is because it is possible to provide benefits, eliminate the monotony of the game production, and enhance the sustainability of the game. In this modification, a predetermined look-ahead effect is provided as a look-ahead effect set to be feasible while staying in the special mode. The predetermined look-ahead effect is the possibility of a big hit winning or a high expectation effect over one or more times of symbol variation display before the operation hold ball (trigger hold) that is the target of the look-ahead lottery is digested. It is a production that suggests or informs in advance. The predetermined look-ahead effect corresponds to, for example, a hold change look-ahead effect that suggests a jackpot expectation by changing the display mode of the hold image. In this modification, as the type of the hold change look-ahead effect, the hold change look-ahead effect A and the hold change look-ahead effect B are provided. In principle, the jackpot expectation of the hold change look-ahead effect is set to be different depending on the final display mode of the hold image as the effect mode. In this modification, six types of display modes of the reserved image are set, for example, "white", "blue", "green", "red", "gold", and "rainbow color". The display mode of this reserved image is related to the reliability (big hit expectation) at which the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, and is related to "white" <"blue" <"green" <"red" <"gold" <". The jackpot expectation is set to increase by one step in the order of "rainbow color". In addition, "rainbow color" is a display mode in which it is promised that a big hit will be won in the variable display performed by digesting the trigger hold that is the target of the look-ahead lottery. Here, the hold change look-ahead effect A is a look-ahead effect in which the hold change can be executed according to the hold change pattern A having a relatively high expectation of a big hit. This hold change pattern A is an effect pattern in which the final display mode of the trigger hold (hold image) that is the target of the look-ahead lottery changes to a display mode (for example, red) with a relatively high expectation of a big hit. On the other hand, the hold change look-ahead effect B is a look-ahead effect in which the hold change can be executed according to the hold change pattern B having a relatively low expectation of a big hit. This hold change pattern B is an effect pattern in which the final display mode of the trigger hold (hold image) that is the target of the look-ahead lottery changes to a display mode (for example, blue) with a relatively low expectation of a big hit. In this modification, the case where the hold change look-ahead effect A is executed is more specific than the case where the hold change look-ahead effect B is executed in the variable display in which the trigger hold that is the target of the look-ahead lottery is exhausted. It is configured to increase the possibility that a premier production will appear. At this time, a specific effect can be executed in the variable display (referred to as "trigger variable display") performed by digesting the trigger hold, but before the variable display performed by digesting the trigger hold. The specific effect is not executed in the variable display (referred to as "pre-trigger variable display"). Regarding the hold change look-ahead effect B, the background effect corresponding to the special mode is easier to execute the hold change look-ahead effect B than the background effect corresponding to the normal mode set after the end of this special mode (execution). The frequency is relatively high). Further, for the button effect (an effect in which a button image prompting the player to operate the effect button 15 is displayed and the player actually operates the effect button 15, the button image is switched to another notice effect, etc.) is a trigger. The trigger variation display is easier to execute than the previous variation display (execution frequency is relatively high). For example, this button effect has a button effect A in which a blue button image is displayed and a button effect B in which a red button image is displayed, and the button effect B has a higher hit expectation than the button effect A. Is relatively high (when the effect button 15 is operated when the button effect B appears, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the effect button 15 is operated when the button effect A appears. Notice production is likely to occur). At this time, at a predetermined timing during execution of the trigger fluctuation display (for example, in the trigger fluctuation display in which the fluctuation display is 60 seconds, the timing 50 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (timing during SP reach)), the button effect is displayed. It is preferable that either A or the button effect B can appear. As a modification thereof, both button effect A and button effect B may appear as long as the trigger variation display is being executed (for example, in the trigger variation display which is a variation display of 60 seconds, the variation starts. Button effect A is executed at the timing 20 seconds after (timing before SP reach), and button effect B is executed at the timing 50 seconds after the start of fluctuation (timing during SP reach). On the other hand, when the button effect appears during the execution of the pre-trigger variation display, the button effect A is more likely to appear than the button effect B. Further, when the specific effect (premier effect) appears during the execution of the trigger variation display, the button effect B is more likely to appear than when the specific effect (premier effect) does not appear during the execution of the trigger variation display.

FIG. 45 is a schematic diagram showing an effect mode table in this modification. In this effect mode table, the upper limit number of times of the effect mode, the counting target of the remaining number of times (type of special symbol), and the timing of displaying the remaining number of times are defined corresponding to each effect mode.

In this modification, an effect mode counter for counting the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol executed during the stay in each effect mode is prepared. That is, the number of times the effect mode is executed (the number of remaining times until the effect mode ends) is controlled based on the count value counted by the effect mode counter. In this effect mode counter, a value corresponding to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol (referred to as "upper limit number of times") is set as an initial value as a period during which the user can stay in the effect mode of the transition destination, and the variation display of the special symbol is displayed. It is updated (subtracted) each time it is executed. That is, when the effect mode shifts to the predetermined effect mode and the upper limit number of times that the effect mode can stay in the predetermined effect mode is set in the effect mode counter, the variation display of the special symbol is executed once. The count value is decremented by 1 each time (every time the variable display of the special symbol is started). Then, when the count value of the effect mode counter reaches "0", it triggers the end of the predetermined effect mode (another effect mode is started from the next variation display). In this modification, the upper limit number of times assigned to the special mode is "20 times", the upper limit number of times assigned to the time saving mode is "70 times", the upper limit number of times assigned to the latent mode is "100 times", and the probability change mode. The maximum number of times assigned to is "100 times". In the normal mode, there is no upper limit to the number of times the special symbol can be displayed.

In this modification, when the effect mode currently staying is the special mode, the effect mode counter displays only the variation display number of the first special symbol as the variation display number of the special symbol executed during the stay in the effect mode. It is subject to counting. That is, when the effect mode is the special mode, the count value of the effect mode counter targets only the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol that is the subject of the game in this special effect mode (normal game state), and the second special. The number of times the symbol changes is displayed is not included. Therefore, the upper limit number of times "20 times" assigned to the special mode means that the number of times of variation display of the first special symbol reaches 20 times. Therefore, since the number of times the variation of the second special symbol is displayed is not counted, the remaining number of times of the special mode is not updated (subtracted) no matter how many times the variation of the second special symbol is displayed. Therefore, this special mode may stay for a period exceeding 20 times (upper limit number of times) as the total value of the variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this way, the actual number of stays in the special mode is a variable period that fluctuates according to the number of variable display times of the second special symbol, but this is a gaming state in which the normal game state has no upper limit as the number of variable display times of the special symbol. It is permissible based on the fact that. When the effect mode is the normal mode, the number of times the variation of the first special symbol is displayed reaches 20 times without the next big hit (when the count value of the effect mode counter reaches the upper limit number of times). ) Will shift to the normal mode.

On the other hand, when the effect mode currently being stayed is the latent mode, the probability change mode, or the time saving mode, the effect mode counter is set as the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol executed during the stay in the effect mode of the first special symbol. The variable display count and the variable display count of the second special symbol are counted (the total number of variable display counts of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is counted). That is, when the effect mode currently being stayed is the latent mode or the like (latent mode, probability change mode, time saving mode), the count value of the effect mode count is the second special that is the main part of the game in this latent mode or the like. Not only the number of fluctuations of the symbol but also the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is targeted. That is, the number of stays in the latent mode or the like is set as the number of times the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated (specified ST number = 100 times) or the number of times the special symbol variation time shortening function is activated (specific number of times = 70 times). It corresponds to the fact that the total value of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol is the target.

In this modification, even if the player is staying in any of the effect modes (excluding the normal mode), the special symbol changes on the screen of the effect display device 70 until the effect mode currently being stayed ends. It is possible to display the remaining number of times of display (count value of the above-mentioned effect mode counter). The display of the remaining number of times in the effect mode is decremented by "1" each time the variation display of the special symbol (variation display of the decorative symbol) is performed, based on the count value of the effect mode counter.

The display of the remaining number of times in the effect mode is executed at different timings depending on the type of effect mode currently being stayed. Specifically, when the effect mode is a special mode, the remaining number of times is displayed from the variation display of the first rotation immediately after the transition to the effect mode. On the other hand, when the effect mode is the latent mode, the probability variation mode, or the time saving mode, the variation display (21st rotation) after the variation display of a predetermined number of times (20 rotations) is completed immediately after the transition to the effect mode. The remaining number of times is displayed from (variation display).

Here, FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram showing an effect example of displaying the remaining number of times in the effect mode. In the figure, (A1) to (A3) are examples of effects when the effect mode currently being stayed is a special mode. Further, (B1) to (B4) in the figure are production examples when the production mode during the current stay is the latent mode. Although not shown, even when the effect mode currently being stayed is the time saving mode or the probability change mode, the effect example is basically the same as the latent mode.

When the effect mode currently being stayed is a special mode, as shown in (A1) to (A3) in the figure, from the fluctuation display of the first rotation to the end of the fluctuation display of the 20th rotation of this special mode. During the period (from the start to the end of the special mode), the remaining number of times will be displayed. That is, while the special mode is being executed, the remaining number of times in the special mode is always displayed.

On the other hand, when the effect mode currently being stayed is the latent mode, the remaining number of times in the latent mode is displayed until the predetermined number of fluctuations (variation display at the 20th rotation) immediately after the transition to the latent mode. However, the remaining number of times in the latent mode is displayed from the variable display after the predetermined number of variable displays (variation display at the 21st rotation) to the end of the latent mode. That is, the display of the remaining number of times is started in the latent probability mode after the variable display of a predetermined number of times is completed. Therefore, in the variable display of a predetermined number of times after shifting to the latent probability mode or the like, the remaining number of times in the latent probability mode is not displayed on the screen, and the player is kept secret from the player. The reason for this is that while the latent mode is being executed, it is a game that mainly displays the fluctuation of the second special symbol, but the first hit occurs in the normal mode, and the latent mode is submerged. In the case of shifting to the probability mode (when shifting from the normal gaming state to the latent probability changing gaming state), the operation of the first special symbol generated during the normal mode is suspended in several rotations immediately after the transition to the latent probability mode. It is extremely likely that the variable display of the first special symbol will be executed by digesting the sphere (the operation holding ball of the first special symbol carried over from the normal mode to the latent mode), and this first special symbol If the remaining number of times in the latent mode is reduced beyond the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by executing the variable display, the remaining number of times is displayed contrary to the player's intention, and the player May cause loss or discomfort. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining number of times of the latent mode is not notified immediately after the latent mode is started, and the variation display of a predetermined number of times (20 times) is completed in the latent mode. It is configured to notify the remaining number of times in the latent mode.

In this modification, "20 times" is set as an example of the predetermined number of times, but the variable display number (4 times) corresponding to at least the maximum value (4 pieces) of the number of pending balls of the first special symbol is set for this predetermined number of times. 4 times) or more is preferable. However, in the present embodiment, the specification of the parallel machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel at the same time is adopted, and the first is being executed during the latent mode. Since the variation display of the second special symbol (short-term variation display) may be performed many times while the variation display of the special symbol (long-term variation display) is performed, the first special symbol may be displayed many times. In order to ensure the concealment period (predetermined number of times) until all the operation hold balls are digested, consider the relationship between the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (No. 1). It is preferable to determine the predetermined number of times (considering the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol that can be executed until all the operation-holding balls of the special symbol are digested). In this modification, the remaining number of times display is displayed small in the upper right corner of the screen (this is referred to as a normal display) as shown in FIG. 46, but when the remaining number of times reaches the specified number of times, it is triggered. The remaining number of times may be displayed other than the normal display (the remaining number of times may be notified in different modes). As a specific example, for example, when the number of remaining times is "10 times", a special display of "10 times remaining" is added to the normal display in the center of the screen (in a display mode larger than the display on the upper right). It may be displayed at the same time. After that, until the remaining number of times is exhausted, not only the normal display but also the special display is displayed at the same time for each fluctuation, such as "9 times remaining", "8 times remaining", ..., "0 times remaining". You may. Further, in the current game state, the event that the special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is not the main subject of the game, has stopped fluctuating and the operation holding ball of the special symbol does not exist is triggered. It may be configured to display the remaining number of times on the screen. That is, in this modified example, the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state (low probability low base state), latent probability change game state (high probability low base state), and probability change game state (high probability high base state) is the first. It is preferable to display the remaining number of times on the condition that the special symbol has stopped fluctuating and the operation holding ball of the first special symbol does not exist.

As described above, according to this modification, when the normal gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state ends in the variable display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times immediately after entering the gaming gaming state. By configuring so that the remaining number of times up to is not notified, the variable display of the second special symbol is the main body of the game during the advantageous gaming state, but the first special symbol generated during the normal gaming state is displayed. Disadvantageous information for the player that the operation holding ball is digested during the advantageous gaming state, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, and the remaining number of times until the advantageous gaming state ends is subtracted. Is not disclosed, so that the player can hardly feel a sense of discomfort or distrust in the progress processing of the game and the notification effect thereof, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 2 of the first embodiment>
In this modification, as the external information signal output from the external information terminal board 600, a predetermined external information signal indicating that the probabilistic gaming state has been changed to the latent probabilistic gaming state is provided. In this modification, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes a big hit and a predetermined specific big hit is won as the big hit type, the first special is counted immediately after the end of the big hit game. The probability variation game state (high probability high base state) is set until the total number of fluctuation display times of the symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (100 times). Then, when the next big hit does not occur by the time the total number of fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times (100 times), and the variation display of the predetermined number of times is completed, the fluctuation display of the predetermined number of times is completed. From the next fluctuation display (101st fluctuation display), the state shifts to the latent probability change game state. At this time, a predetermined external information signal is turned on and output from the end of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays in the probability variation game state or the start of the first variation display in the latent probability variation game state to the end of the latent probability variation game state. To.

<Modification 3 of the first embodiment>
In this modification, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the variation display of one special symbol is the big hit variation display and the variation display of the other special symbol is the small hit variation display, one of them. In the situation where the big hit variation display of one special symbol and the small hit variation display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, before the big hit variation display of one special symbol ends, the small of the other special symbol When the hit variation display ends, the small hit variation display of the other special symbol ends or the small hit game is executed, and the big hit variation display of one special symbol is off and forced by the variation display. To end. That is, even if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit for one of the special symbols, it is replaced with a deviation when the fluctuation display is stopped. In addition, it is preferable that the jackpot variation display of one of the above special symbols is a variation display (variation display that triggers the execution of the predetermined jackpot game) that is executed when the predetermined jackpot is hit among the plurality of jackpot types. Is. Therefore, if it is a jackpot other than the predetermined jackpot among the plurality of jackpot types, as in the above embodiment, one of them is from the end of the small hit variation display of the other special symbol to the end of the small hit game. The jackpot fluctuation display of the special symbol of is interrupted (measurement of fluctuation time is interrupted).

<Modification 4 of the first embodiment>
In this modification, the variable effect of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable effect of the decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are performed. Is displayed in parallel on the screen of the effect display device 70, and the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed in synchronization with or linked with the variable display of the first special symbol, and is synchronized with or synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol. The second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner in an interlocking manner. At this time, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is the big hit fluctuation display and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display, the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation of the first special symbol is displayed. In a situation where the display and the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol is displayed before the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the first special symbol is completed. When is finished, the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol is displayed even before the measurement time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol reaches the preset specified fluctuation time (variation time according to the design value). At the end of, the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the first special symbol is forcibly terminated as the missed fluctuation display in conjunction with or synchronized with it. Therefore, on the screen, the "big hit symbol combination" is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol combination of the second decorative symbol, and the "missing symbol combination" is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol combination of the first decorative symbol. At this time, after the end of the jackpot game executed by stopping and displaying the stop symbol combination of the second special symbol in the jackpot symbol combination according to the display mode of the stop symbol combination (missing symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol. , It is configured so that the degree of expectation to enter the latent probability change game state (small hit RUSH mode) is different. Specifically, when the stop symbol combination of the first decorative symbol is the out-of-order symbol combination A (for example, the order of "1, 2, 3", etc.), the expectation of entering the latent probability change game state is high. In the case of a missed symbol combination B (for example, a random number such as "1 ・ 3 ・ 8"), the degree of expectation of entering the latent probability change game state is set to the degree of low expectation. In addition, when the out-of-order symbol combination A is stopped and displayed, the specification may be such that the transition to the latent probability change gaming state is definite.

Further, in this modification, when the variation display of the special symbol of the first special symbol is the jackpot variation display and the variation display of the second special symbol is the small hit variation display, the variation display of the first special symbol is the jackpot variation display. When the small hit variation display of the second special symbol is completed before the variation display of the first special symbol is completed in the situation where the small hit variation display of the second special symbol is executed in parallel. From the time when the small hit variation display of the second special symbol ends to the end of the small hit game, the big hit variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted, but the big hit variation of this first special symbol A predetermined image (for example, the message "variation is suspended") is displayed while the display is interrupted, and the stop symbol combination of the first special symbol is displayed according to the display mode (for example, the display color) of the predetermined image. May be configured so that the expectation of entering the latent probability change game state (small hit RUSH mode) is different after the end of the big hit game executed by the stop display of the big hit symbol combination.

<Modification 5 of the first embodiment>
In this modification, when the condition device is activated when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol, the player is instructed to pass the game ball through the winning combination operation gates 91 and 92. The combination operation gate passage instruction effect is executed. In the combination operation gate passage instruction effect, the game ball that has passed through the combination operation gates 91 and 92 is the combination operation gate after the change display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol (after the condition device is activated). It is executed until it is detected by the switches 911 and 921 (until the continuous accessory actuating device starts operating). As the effect of instructing the passage of the combination operation gate, a message instructing that the game ball should be fired toward the combination operation gates 91 and 92, such as "Aim at the combination operation gate", is displayed on the screen. do. Further, in the combination operation gate passage instruction effect, the sound corresponding to the content of the screen display is simultaneously output from the speaker 11 in accordance with this screen display. Therefore, in the combination operation gate passage instruction effect, the player is urged to pay attention from both the image display and the voice.

At this time, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol, and the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state). ), The variation display of the second special symbol may be configured to be different from the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol, and the effect mode (screen display, voice) of the combination operation gate passage instruction effect may be different. That is, there is a mode of producing a combination operation gate passage instruction effect that is executed when the first hit occurs, and a mode of producing a combination operation gate passage instruction effect that is executed when a so-called accident hit occurs. Is preferably different.

In addition, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol, and the gaming state is the probability changing gaming state (high probability high base state). At this time, the effect mode (screen display, voice) of the combination operation gate passage instruction effect may be different depending on whether the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol. That is, the production mode of the combination operation gate passage instruction effect that is executed when a so-called accident hit occurs, and the production of the combination operation gate passage instruction effect that is executed when the big hit consecutive villa occurs. It is preferable that the embodiment is different.

<Variation Example 6 of the First Embodiment>
In this modification, "probability big hit" is provided as the big hit type of the second special symbol, and the opening pattern of the big winning opening 54 in the big hit game is substantially the same as or similar to the opening pattern of the big winning opening 54 in the small hit game. It shall be. For example, assuming that the opening pattern of the large winning opening 54 in the small hit game is "opening for about 1.8 seconds x 1 time", the opening pattern of the large winning opening 54 in each round game of the big hit game is also "about 1. Open for 8 seconds x 1 time ". Therefore, for example, in a jackpot game that is executed when a sudden jackpot of N rounds is won, an opening pattern of "opening for about 1.8 seconds x 1 time" is performed over N rounds (N times). Become. As a result, the big hit game and the small hit game are played with an apparently similar opening time and opening pattern, and the big hit game when a latent big hit occurs is used as a multiple (N times) small hit game. It can be shown in a pseudo manner.

<Modification 7 of the first embodiment>
In this modification, unlike the gaming machine (number-cutting probability change machine) of the above embodiment, the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is configured as a normal probability change machine that continues from the end of the big hit game to the occurrence of the next big hit. Has been done. Therefore, (1) when the gaming state after the end of the big hit game shifts to the probability changing gaming state (high probability high base state), the number of probability fluctuations, the number of fluctuation time reductions, and the number of easy ball entry states are "∞ times (65535 times)". ) ”Is set, and (2) when the gaming state after the jackpot game ends shifts to the latent probability changing gaming state (high probability low base state), the number of probability fluctuations and the number of fluctuation time reductions are“ ∞ times (65535 times) ”. , "0 times" is set as the number of easy ball entry states, and (3) when the game state after the end of the big hit game shifts to the short game state (low probability high base state), the number of variable time reductions and easy ball entry When "70 times" is set as the number of states and "0 times" is set as the number of probability fluctuations, and (4) the gaming state after the end of the big hit game shifts to the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), the number of probability fluctuations , "0 times" is set as the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time and the number of times of easy entry. Therefore, regarding the transition control of the gaming state, basically, except that the number of continuations of the probabilistic gaming state and the latent probabilistic gaming state is changed from "100 times" to "∞ times (65535 times)", the above-mentioned first It is the same as 1 Embodiment.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the portions having the same configuration. The explanation is omitted, and the different parts are mainly explained. That is, in the following description, except for special cases, it is possible to apply the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

FIG. 47 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment. On the front surface of the game board 20, the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42 are fixedly fixed in an arc shape, and a substantially circular game area PA on which the game ball can roll is formed as a section. A center decoration 21 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is visibly provided through the central opening of the center decoration 21. Further, the game area PA has a left side area PA1 which is a left side area (board surface area corresponding to left hitting) of the center decoration 21 and a right side area (right side hitting) of the center decoration 21 with the center decoration 21 in the center as a reference. It is partitioned into the right side area PA2 which is the board surface area corresponding to the above. An introduction passage 44 connecting the left side region PA1 and the right side region PA2 is provided in the upper part of the center decoration 21, so that the right-handed game ball can reach the right side region PA2 through the introduction passage 44. ing.

The left first starting port 51A is arranged in the area below the center decoration 21. The left first starting port 51A is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and includes a first starting opening switch 511A for detecting the entry of a game ball. The left first starting port 51A is a constantly open type winning opening that is open upward, and a game ball (a game ball hit to the left) that mainly flows down the left region PA1 can enter. The entry of the game ball into the left first starting port 51A triggers the first special symbol lottery.

The right first starting port 51B is arranged in the right area (right area PA2) of the center decoration 21. Like the left first starting port 51A described above, the right first starting port 51B is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and the first starting for detecting the entry of the game ball. It is equipped with a mouth switch 511B. The right first starting port 51B is a constantly open type winning opening that is open upward, and a game ball (a game ball hit to the right) that mainly flows down the right area PA2 can enter. The entry of the game ball into the right first starting port 51B triggers the first special symbol lottery.

Here, above the right side region PA2, a right side passage 45 through which the game ball passing through the connecting passage 44 flows down is formed. The right flow path 45 is defined between the outer rail 41 and the right wall portion of the center decoration 21, and is formed to have a flow path width narrower than twice the diameter of the game ball and allowing the game ball to pass only in one row. There is. The right side flow path 45 communicates with the first branch flow path 46 and the second branch flow path 47. The first branch flow path 46 is formed along the outer edge of the right wall portion of the center decoration 21, and the second branch flow path 47 is formed along the outer edge of the outer rail 41. Both the first branch flow path 46 and the second branch flow path 47 are formed in a flow path width through which the game ball can flow down, and the game ball that has passed through the right side flow path 45 is the first branch flow path 46 or It is designed to flow into the second branch flow path 47. Between the first branch flow path 46 and the second branch flow path 47, a game ball flowing down the right branch flow path 45 is selectively inserted into either the first branch flow path 46 or the second branch flow path 47. A distribution member 48 for distribution is provided.

The distribution member 48 has a closed position in which the tip end portion (upper end portion) faces substantially vertically upward and closes the first branch flow path 46 around a support axis extending substantially orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 20. The tip portion (upper end portion) is swingably attached to the open position where the first branch flow path 46 is opened so as to be directed diagonally upward to the right. Although not shown, the distribution member 48 is connected to a solenoid as a driving means, and by controlling the energization / non-energization of this solenoid to expand and contract the plunger, a surface substantially parallel to the surface of the game board 20 The swing is controlled between the closed position and the open position. This solenoid is electrically connected to the main control board 100, and is driven and controlled based on the drive signal output from the main control board 100. The distribution member 48 is driven to an open position or a closed position at predetermined time intervals according to a predetermined drive pattern set in advance. Specifically, the distribution member 48 alternately repeats opening for 0.1 seconds and closing for 1.9 seconds (opening time: closing time = 1:19). Therefore, of the game balls flowing down the right region PA2, about 5% (1/20) of the game balls flow down the first branch flow path 46, and about 95% (19/20) of the game balls flow down to the second branch. It is designed to flow down the flow path 47. The distribution ratio of the game ball can be arbitrarily set, for example, the first branch flow path 46 and the first branch flow path 46 at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 1: 1 or 1: 2, 2: 1). A configuration that is selectively distributed to the two-branch flow path 47 may be adopted. Further, the distribution member 48 is not electrically driven, but swings between the open position and the closed position due to the action of the game ball's own weight or ball pressure, and the game ball is moved to the first branch flow path. It may be configured to distribute to 46 or the second branch flow path 47.

A right first starting port 51B is provided downstream of the first branch flow path 46, and a game ball flowing down the first branch flow path 46 is configured to enter the right first starting port 51B. ing. On the other hand, a working gate 53, a large winning opening 54, and a second starting opening 52 are provided downstream of the second branch flow path 47.

The actuating gate 53 is provided as a start winning opening corresponding to a normal symbol game, and includes an actuating gate switch 531 for detecting the passage of a game ball. The passage of the game ball through the operating gate 53 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting port 52.

The large winning opening 54 is formed as a winning opening having a horizontally rectangular shape that is opened when the winning / failing lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. The large prize opening 54 is a large winning opening switch 541 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a special electric accessory 542 generally called an attacker, and a large prize for opening and closing the special electric accessory 542. It is equipped with a mouth solenoid 543. The special electric accessory 542 is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 54 or is difficult to enter. In special games (big hit game, small hit game), when launching a game ball, hitting the right area PA2 by aiming at the right side, so-called right-handed, makes it easier to enter the big winning opening 54. There is.

The special electric accessory 542 includes a movable member 544 that can be slid back and forth to open and close the large winning opening 54. The movable member 544 has a closed position (protruding position) in which the large winning opening 54 is closed to make it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter, and the large winning opening 54 is opened to allow or facilitate the entry of the game ball. It is possible to slide in the front-back direction (direction orthogonal to the board surface) from the open position (retracted position). The upper surface of the movable member 544 has a passage width of about one game ball or more in the front-rear direction, and is formed so as to incline downward from the right side to the left side in the front view. Therefore, when the movable member 544 is in the closed position (when the large winning opening 54 is in the closed state), the game ball can flow down using the upper surface of the movable member 544 as a taxiway, and the game ball can flow down on the taxiway from right to left. It flows down to and falls from the left end of the special electric accessory 542 (flows down toward the second starting port 52).

A second starting port 52 is arranged diagonally to the lower left of the special electric accessory 542, and is special when the special electric accessory 542 is in the closed position (when the large winning opening 54 is in the closed state). The game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the electric accessory 542 will flow down toward the second starting port 52, and if the second starting port 52 is open at that time, the game ball will move to the second starting port 52. It is easy to enter the ball. On the other hand, when the movable member 544 is in the open position (when the second starting port 52 is in the open state), it is extremely easy for the game ball flowing down the second flow path to enter the large winning opening 54. It has become. In the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the second flow path has a board surface design (gauge design) that flows toward the large winning opening 54 (ordinary electric accessory 522) with an extremely high probability, and is a large winning opening. When the 54 is in the closed state, the game ball is guided to the upper surface of the movable member 544 and flows down toward the second starting port 52, while when the large winning opening 54 is in the open state, the game ball is a large winning opening. It is configured so that the ball does not enter the 54 and reach the second starting port 52.

The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and includes a second starting opening switch 521 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The second starting port 51 is arranged in the right side area PA2 which is a board surface area corresponding to the right-handed hit, and a game ball (a right-handed game ball) which mainly flows down the right side area PA2 can enter. The entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 triggers the second special symbol lottery. The second starting port 52 includes an ordinary electric accessory 522 generally referred to as an electric chew, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 523 for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 522. The ordinary electric accessory 522 is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 52 or is difficult to enter. That is, the normal electric accessory 522 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 unless it is displaced to the open state, and the normal electric accessory 522 is in the open state at a predetermined opportunity (the opportunity to win the normal symbol lottery). Then, the ease of entering the game ball becomes high.

In the second embodiment configured in this way, for the same purpose as in the first embodiment described above, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the left side region PA1 becomes the main region of the game, and the gaming state is the advantageous gaming. In the case of a state (time saving game state, latent probability change game state, probability change game state), the right side area PA2 is the main area of the game. At this time, two start ports 51B and 52 (right first start port 51B and second start port 52) are arranged in the right side area PA, and when the game ball is launched aiming at the right side area PA2, The game ball is selectively divided into a flow path toward the right first start port 51B and a flow path toward the second start port 52 according to the operation position (open position, closed position) of the distribution member 48. .. Therefore, when the gaming state is an advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state, latent probability-changing gaming state, probability-changing gaming state), the game ball is entered into the first starting port 51B or the second starting port 52 by right-handed striking. It is a game property in which the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol) and the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (variation display of the second special symbol) are executed in parallel at the same time. That is, when the gaming state is an advantageous gaming state, the variation display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is easily performed while the variation display of the other special symbol is performed. (It is easy for the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol to be performed in parallel at the same time).

As a modification thereof, in the case of a predetermined advantageous gaming state (for example, a latent probability changing gaming state) among a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states, the distribution member 48 is driven to move the game ball to the right first. While selectively flowing down to the starting port 51B side or the second starting port 52 side, in the case of other advantageous gaming states (for example, time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state), the distribution member 48 is not driven. The game ball may be configured to always flow down to the second starting port 52 side.

In the pachinko gaming machine PM of the second embodiment having such a configuration, various gaming effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board 200 according to the progress of the game and the like. In the following, among various game productions, the main production contents in the latent probability mode (small hit RUSH mode) will be described.

<Invincible zone production>
The invincible zone production in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a time chart of the invincible zone production. The invincible zone effect is an advantageous state for the player by switching to a special background image different from the normal one during the variable display of the big hit, which is performed when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol becomes a big hit. It is an effect that suggests or informs that it is an invincible zone).

First, when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state, as described above, the latent selection state is set as the variation pattern selection state corresponding to this latent probability changing gaming state. When the variation pattern selection state is set to the latent selection state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected with reference to the variation pattern table 4 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is a variation in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to an extremely long time (10 minutes). Pattern PA4-4 is selected. At this time, while the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is being performed, the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol is in a non-lottery state of the jackpot, and the jackpot is derived as a result of the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol. Only small hits or misses will be derived. Here, if the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds) as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. If the variation pattern PHA4-1 is selected and the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is incorrect, the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short (1 second) as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. ) Is selected for the variation pattern PH4-1. Therefore, while the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol is being performed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is quickly digested, and it is possible to perform a hit / fail judgment (lottery) about several hundred times for the second special symbol. Will be.

As described above, when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state, the winning probability of the big hit is set to a high probability (about 1/80), and normally until the above-mentioned hundreds of fluctuation displays are performed. It is very likely that the next big hit will occur during that time (there is a very high probability that the small hit RUSH mode will end accordingly). The "end of the small hit RUSH mode" also includes the temporary termination of the small hit RUSH mode (latent probability variation game state). That is, if the jackpot that triggers the transition to the latent probability change gaming state is won, the jackpot game is started, so that the jackpot gaming state (normal gaming state / low probability low base state) is once set. After the jackpot game ends, the latent probability changing game state is entered again, and in that case, it can be said that the latent probability changing game state ends "once". However, during the execution of the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol, the jackpot is not drawn in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol, and the jackpot of the second special symbol is not derived (the small hit RUSH mode is set). (Because it never ends), the player can make a lot of small hits almost unlimitedly in the above-mentioned fluctuation display of several hundred times (the number of balls can be increased by the frequent occurrence of small hit games). Can be given to.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the effect mode currently being stayed is the latent mode, the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is executed when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot. Invincible zone effect suggesting or notifying that the latent mode (small hit RUSH mode) is an invincible state (a state advantageous for the player) that does not end in the middle during the execution of the fluctuation display. Is configured to be executable.

As shown in FIG. 48, the invincible zone effect is executed from the start of the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol to the end of the jackpot variation display. That is, the invincible zone effect is executed during the period in which the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol is controlled to the big hit non-lottery state. During the execution of the invincible zone effect, only the small hit or the miss is derived as a result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol, and only the variable display of the small hit or the variable display of the miss is executed as the variation display of the second special symbol. To.

FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen for producing an invincible zone. When the invincible zone effect is started, the background image displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70 is switched from the background image dedicated to the latent mode to the background image dedicated to the invincible zone. During the execution of this invincible zone effect, a band image 721 in which the characters "ZONE" are shown are displayed at the left and right edges of the screen as the background display (background image that is the back display of the decorative pattern). As a result, the player is suggested or notified that the current state of the game has entered the invincible zone. Then, when the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends, the invincible zone effect ends (the latent mode ends), and the game shifts to the jackpot game.

During the execution of the special zone effect, the background image is switched to the special background image as described above, but along with this, the display mode of the decorative pattern variation effect (reach effect, etc.), the advance notice effect, and the look-ahead advance notice effect is also special. It may be a special display mode dedicated to zone production.

<Remaining fluctuation time notification effect>
Next, the residual fluctuation time notification effect in the second embodiment will be described. The remaining fluctuation time notification effect is the same during the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol, which is performed when the game state is the latent probability variation gaming state and the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot. It is an effect of notifying the remaining time (referred to as "remaining fluctuation time") until the jackpot fluctuation display ends. The remaining time display unit 722 (see FIG. 49 above) provided on the screen of the effect display device 70 displays the remaining fluctuation time until the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol ends in a countdown format. During the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol, the jackpot is prohibited from being derived as a result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol, and the jackpot is in a non-lottery state, and the above-mentioned invincible zone effect is executed. Will be. Therefore, it can be said that this remaining fluctuation time informs the remaining time until the end of the invincible zone.

The remaining fluctuation time is managed based on the time value of the effect time timer provided in the effect control means 220 of the effect control board 200. In this effect time timer, a predetermined fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is set as an initial value. That is, the specified fluctuation time means the fluctuation time specified in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 10 to 14. Therefore, if the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state, the variation of the first special symbol is as defined in the variation pattern table of FIG. The time is "10 minutes". Therefore, when the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is started, "10 minutes" is set as an initial value in the effect time timer. The timed value of the effect time timer is subtracted with the passage of time from the time when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and becomes "0" when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends. To reach. The effect time timer starts timing when it receives a fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control board 100.

Here, when the small hit game is executed because the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a small hit while the big hit fluctuation display of the first special symbol is being performed, it is provided on the main control board 100 side. The control is different from the time processing by the special symbol game timer provided and the time processing by the effect time timer provided on the effect control board 200 side. The special symbol game timer includes a first special symbol game timer and a second special symbol game timer. Hereinafter, the timekeeping process of each timer will be described.

(Timekeeping processing of special symbol game timer)
FIG. 50 is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation interruption processing of the special symbol. As described above, the small hit game is executed when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol becomes a small hit during the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. If so, the variable display of one of the special symbols is interrupted from the time when the small hit game is started until the end of the small hit game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50, when the small hit game is executed when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the variable display of the big hit of the first special symbol, the small hit game is executed. Until the hit game is completed, the variable display of the big hit of the first special symbol is interrupted. That is, while the small hit game is being executed, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted (execution time of the small hit game = interruption time of the variation display of the first special symbol). As a result, the special symbol game timer provided on the main control board 100 suspends (pauses) the time counting of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol from the start to the end of the small hit game. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the special symbol game timer restarts the timing of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and the measurement time of the fluctuation time before the restart and the measurement time of the fluctuation time after the restart are set. When the total time reaches a predetermined fluctuation time (variation time according to the design value), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends. In this example, the execution time of the small hit game is set to "3 seconds". The execution time of this small hit game is the total time of the small hit start demo time, one round time, and the small hit end demo time.

(Timekeeping process of production time timer)
On the other hand, the effect time timer executes the small hit game when the small hit game is executed when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the variable display of the first special symbol. The time (the time when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is interrupted) is added to the timed value as an additional time, and the timed is continued even during the execution of the small hit game. Specifically, the effect time timer is a time of "3 seconds" allocated as the execution time of the small hit game when the small hit game of the second special symbol occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol. Continue timing as it is with the value added. As a result, the execution time (3 seconds) of the small hit game is added to the effect time timer each time the small hit game occurs. Along with this, the remaining fluctuation time displayed on the screen is also displayed with a time value of "3 seconds" added each time a small hit game occurs, corresponding to the time value of the effect time timer. Hereinafter, this time value addition display effect is also referred to as a “timer addition effect”. Therefore, in this residual fluctuation time notification effect, the residual variation time until the end of the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is increased or decreased in an effectful manner, and the residual variation time is pseudo-extended by the occurrence of the timer addition effect. The more you play, the more you can expect to get a ball out of a small hit game.

Subsequently, an example of the effect of the residual fluctuation time notification effect will be described. FIG. 51 is a schematic diagram showing an effect example of the residual fluctuation time notification effect. It should be noted that, on the screen, an effect related to the second special symbol game (variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol), which is the main body of the game in this latent mode, is displayed. Further, in the figure, in order to facilitate the understanding of this effect example, the time value of the special symbol game timer and the time value of the effect time timer are added to the right side of each screen display.

As shown in (A) in the figure, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol becomes a big hit, the timed value of the effect time timer is displayed on the screen. The time according to is displayed as the remaining fluctuation time. At this point, "1 minute 00 seconds" is displayed as a time value corresponding to the initial value of the effect time timer in the remaining fluctuation time on the screen. The effect time timer is updated every time the effect control side timer interrupt process is executed (every interrupt cycle), but the display of the remaining fluctuation time on the screen is updated in units of 1 second.

As shown in (B) in the figure, when 1 second has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, 1 second is subtracted from the initial value, and the remaining fluctuation time displayed on the screen is "9". It will be updated to "minute 59 seconds". The remaining fluctuation time displayed in the remaining time display area 722 in this way is "10 minutes 00 seconds" → "9 minutes 59 seconds" → "9 minutes 58 seconds" → ... → "0" with the passage of time. It is updated every second, such as "minute 00 seconds". In the figure (B), the out-of-order symbol combination (“1-5-8”) is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol.

As shown in (C) in the figure, when 2 seconds have passed since the variation display of the first special symbol was started, 2 seconds were subtracted from the initial value, and the remaining variation time was updated to "9 minutes 58 seconds". Will be done. In the figure, the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a small hit, and after the variation display for an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), the small hit symbol combination ("3-3") is used as the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol. -7 ") is stopped and displayed. At present, the timed value of the special symbol game counter and the timed value of the effect time counter are the same.

As shown in (D) in the figure, when 3 seconds have passed since the variation display of the first special symbol was started (normally, the remaining variation time on the screen is updated to "9 minutes 57 seconds". When), when the small hit game is started, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted until the small hit game is completed. Therefore, the special symbol game timer pauses the timekeeping from the start of the small hit game to the end of the small hit game. On the other hand, the effect time timer does not pause the timekeeping even during the small hit game, and continues the timekeeping as it is after adding "3 seconds", which is the execution time of the small hit game, as an additional time. Therefore, the remaining fluctuation time displayed on the screen is increased from "9 minutes 57 seconds" to "1 minute 00 seconds" by adding "3 seconds" as the execution time of the small hit game. Therefore, the time value of the effect time timer (display of the remaining fluctuation time on the screen) is increased by 3 seconds for the additional time as compared with the time value of the special symbol game timer. As a result, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is extended by 3 seconds for the purpose of seeing it. By adding the additional time corresponding to the execution time of the small hit game in this way, a feeling of ball ejection commensurate with this additional time can be obtained, and the end time of the small hit RUSH mode is postponed. , The feelings of the player can be further enhanced.

As shown in (E) in the figure, when 6 seconds have passed since the variation display of the first special symbol was started (when the small hit game was completed), the remaining variation time was updated to "9 minutes 57 seconds". Will be done. That is, the effect time timer keeps the time counting for 3 seconds corresponding to the additional time (execution time of the small hit game), so that the time measuring value becomes "9 minutes 57 seconds". On the other hand, as a result of interrupting the time measurement from the start time to the end time of the small hit game, the special symbol game timer has a time measurement value of "9 minutes 57 seconds". As a result, at the end of this small hit game, the timed value of the special symbol game timer and the timed value of the effect time timer match, and the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is the actual remaining time and the effect. There is no discrepancy with the remaining time.

As shown in (F) in the figure, when 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, the remaining variation time is updated to "9 minutes 56 seconds". After that, every time the small hit game is executed with the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol as a small hit, 3 seconds is added to the remaining fluctuation time display on the screen, and this additional time ( It is possible to obtain a feeling of ball ejection according to the extension time of the variable display). In addition, since it is possible to recognize that the latent mode will continue until the remaining fluctuation time displayed on the screen becomes "0", it is possible to eliminate the anxiety of not knowing how long the latent mode will continue. be able to. As a modification thereof, the remaining fluctuation time display may be added only after a plurality of small hit games are executed during the execution of the long-time fluctuation display of the first special symbol. In other words, instead of being added for 3 seconds each time the small hit game is executed, for example, the lottery for executing the additional effect until the small hit is executed 10 times is not won, and the additional effect is performed after the small hit is executed 10 times. If you win the lottery to execute, you may add 30 seconds (3 seconds x 10 times = 30 seconds) to one volume at that time.

As described above, according to the second embodiment, while the small hit RUSH mode is being executed, the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit (so-called accident hit), and as a variation display of the big hit of the first special symbol. When the long-term fluctuation display (long fluctuation display) is executed, the constraint that only small hits or misses are derived as the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol during the execution of this long-term fluctuation display is used. By performing an invincible zone effect suggesting or notifying that the player is in an advantageous state while the long-time variation display is being executed, the time scale of the long-term variation display is performed during the execution of the invincible zone effect. The player can fully enjoy the small hit RUSH mode because he / she can expect the balls to be put out according to the number of balls and give the player a sense of security that the small hit RUSH mode does not end in the middle. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the second embodiment, while the small hit RUSH mode is being executed, the change display of the big hit of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol being the big hit. In addition, when the small hit game is executed based on the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol being a small hit, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the execution of the small hit game ( This variation display was interrupted when the information display related to the remaining time until the end of the variation display was performed in a dramatic manner by using the constraint of (pausing the timing of the variation time related to the variation display). By notifying the remaining time in the form of adding a time value, as the remaining time increases due to the occurrence of a small hit game, the player can fully feel the feeling of a ball coming out and the continuous feeling of a small hit. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

<Modification 1 of the second embodiment>
In the second embodiment, when the game state is the latent probability change game state and the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, it always changes regardless of the big hit type (type of big hit symbol). The fluctuation pattern PA4-4 whose time is set to a long time (10 minutes) is selected, and the invincible zone effect and the timer addition effect are executed during the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol. , Not limited to this configuration, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, a different fluctuation pattern (variation time) can be selected according to the big hit type, and a specific fluctuation is made. Only when a pattern is selected, the invincible zone effect and the timer addition effect may be executed during the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol (during the variation display based on a specific variation pattern). It is preferable that the specific fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to an extremely long time (for example, 10 minutes). On the other hand, the other non-specific fluctuation patterns are preferably fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a relatively short time (for example, 1 minute) as compared with the specific fluctuation pattern. be.

Specifically, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, and the big hit type is a big hit that triggers a transition to a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, or a probabilistic gaming state, the first special As the fluctuation pattern of the symbol, a specific fluctuation pattern set for an extremely long time (10 minutes) is selected, and the invincible zone effect and the timer addition effect are executed during the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol. .. According to the configuration, if the invincible zone effect and the remaining variation time notification effect are executed during the big hit change display of the first special symbol, the latent probability change game state (small hit RUSH mode) is re-entered after the big hit game is completed. Although it does not enter, the player can fully enjoy the small hit RUSH mode during the execution of the effect because the small hit RUSH mode does not end.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, only when the big hit type is a big hit that triggers the transition to the latent probability change gaming state, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is extremely long. A specific fluctuation pattern set to (10 minutes) may be selected, and the invincible zone effect and the residual variation time notification effect may be executed during the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol. According to the configuration, when the invincible zone effect and the timer addition effect are executed during the big hit variation display of the first special symbol, the number of balls to be ejected can be increased due to the frequent occurrence of the small hit game during the execution of the effect. Since it is possible to give the player a privilege and a privilege to re-enter the latent probability change game state even after the jackpot game is over, the player's invincible zone effect and timer addition effect can be generated. It is possible to further raise expectations.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the portions having the same configuration. The explanation is omitted, and the different parts are mainly explained. That is, in the following description, except for special cases, it is possible to apply the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

FIG. 52 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment. On the front surface of the game board 20, the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42 are fixedly fixed in an arc shape, and a substantially circular game area PA on which the game ball can roll is formed as a section. A center decoration 21 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is visibly provided through the central opening of the center decoration 21. Further, the game area PA has a left side area PA1 which is a left side area of the center decoration 21 (a board area corresponding to left-handed hitting) and a right side area of the center decoration 21 (right-handed hitting) with the center decoration 21 in the center as a reference. It is partitioned into the right side area PA2 which is the board surface area corresponding to the above. An introduction passage 44 connecting the left side region PA1 and the right side region PA2 is provided in the upper part of the center decoration 21, so that the right-handed game ball can reach the right side region PA2 through the introduction passage 44. ing.

The upper first starting port 51A is arranged in the area below the center decoration 21. The upper first starting port 51A is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and includes a first starting opening switch 511A for detecting the entry of a game ball. Further, the first starting port 51A is a constantly open type winning opening that is opened upward, and a game ball (a game ball hit to the left) that mainly flows down the left side region PA1 can enter. The entry of the game ball into the upper first starting port 51A triggers the first special symbol lottery.

Below the upper first starting port 51A, the lower first starting port 51B is arranged. The lower first starting port 51B is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, like the above-mentioned upper first starting port 51A, and is mainly a game ball (struck left) flowing down the left side region PA1. A game ball) can be entered. The entry of the game ball into the lower first starting port 51B triggers the first special symbol lottery. The lower first starting port 51B opens and closes and drives a second starting port switch 511B for detecting the entry of a game ball, an ordinary electric accessory 512 generally called an electric chew, and the ordinary electric accessory 512. It is equipped with a normal electric accessory solenoid 513 for the purpose. The ordinary electric accessory 512 is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the lower first starting port 51B or is difficult to enter. That is, the ordinary electric accessory 512 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the lower first starting port 51B unless it is displaced to the open state, and the predetermined opportunity described later (the opportunity to win the ordinary symbol lottery). When it is in the open state, the ease of entering the game ball increases.

An actuating gate 53 is arranged on the left side of the lower first starting port 51B. The actuating gate 53 is provided as a start winning opening corresponding to a normal symbol game, and includes an actuating gate switch 531 for detecting the passage of a game ball. The passage of the game ball through the operating gate 53 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the lower first starting port 51B.

The second starting opening 52 is arranged in the right area (right area PA2) of the center decoration 21, and the large winning opening 54 is arranged diagonally to the lower left of the second starting opening 52. The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and includes a second starting opening switch 521 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The second starting port 52 is a constantly open type winning opening that is opened upward, and a game ball (a game ball hit to the right) that mainly flows down the right side region PA2 can enter. The entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 triggers the second special symbol lottery.

The large winning opening 54 is formed as a winning opening having a horizontally rectangular shape that is opened when the winning / failing lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. The large prize opening 54 is a large winning opening switch 541 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a special electric accessory 542 generally called an attacker, and a large prize for opening and closing the special electric accessory 542. It is equipped with a mouth solenoid 543. The special electric accessory 542 is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 54 or is difficult to enter. In special games (big hit game, small hit game), when launching a game ball, hitting the right area PA2 by aiming at the right side, so-called right-handed, makes it easier to enter the big winning opening 54. There is.

In the third embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side region PA1 can mainly enter any of the upper first starting port 51A, the lower first starting port 51B (ordinary electric accessory 512), and the operating gate 53. be. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA2 can mainly enter the second starting opening 52 or the large winning opening 54.

Subsequently, the gaming state in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, a normal game state, a time-saving game state, a latent probability change game state, and a probability change game state are set as a plurality of types of game states.

FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table according to the third embodiment. In the game state setting table, the game state to be transferred after the end of the big hit game is set for each big hit type (type of symbol group). The jackpot type (type of symbol group) of the third embodiment is the same as the jackpot type (type of symbol group) of the first embodiment, and as the jackpot type (type of symbol group) of the first special symbol, " It has 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A), "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B)", "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C)", and "4R normal jackpot (symbol group D)", and is the second. As the jackpot type (type of symbol group) of the special symbol, "10R specific jackpot (symbol group E)", "6R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group F)", "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G)", "4R" It has a specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H) and a "2R normal jackpot (symbol group I)". In this third embodiment, when the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the gaming states after the end of the big hit game are (A) big hit type (type of symbol group) and (B) when the big hit is won. It is set according to the game state of. The number of continuations of each game state (the number of times of variation display of the special symbol) is the number of probability fluctuations (the number of probability variation operations) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated and the variation time in which the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is activated. It is set based on the number of shortened times (number of times of shortened operation time) and the number of times of easy entry into the ball (number of times of electric support operation) in which the electric chew support function is activated. The probability fluctuation function of the special symbol may be continued until the next big hit occurs. Further, as the number of probability fluctuations, "10000 times" may be set, which substantially corresponds to the number of fluctuations displayed until the next big hit occurs.

When "10R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" or "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B)" is won in the first special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game The latent probability change game state is set as the game state. When shifting to the latent probability changing game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability fluctuation number "100 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "100 times", and the ball entry easy state number "0 times" are set. Therefore, the latent probability change game state continues until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times), and the special If the latent probability change game state ends when the number of times the symbol changes is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), the game shifts from the next special symbol change display to the normal game state, and the next big hit occurs. When the latent probability change game state ends with, the game state shifts to the game state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends.

When "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C)" is won in the first special symbol, the probabilistic gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When shifting to the probabilistic game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability variation number "100 times", the variation time shortening number "100 times", and the ball entry easy state number "100 times" are set. Therefore, the probabilistic gaming state continues until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times), and the special symbol is continued. If the probability change game state ends when the fluctuation display number of When the game state ends, the game state shifts to the game state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends.

When the "4R normal jackpot (symbol group D)" is won in the first special symbol, the time-saving gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability fluctuation number "0 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "70 times", and the ball entry easy state number "70 times" are set. Therefore, the time-saving gaming state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches a specific number of times (70 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specific number of times (70 times), and the special symbol changes. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of display times reaches a specific number of times (70 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next special symbol fluctuation display, and the time-saving game state changes when the next big hit occurs. When it ends, it shifts to the game state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends.

When "10R specific jackpot (symbol group E)", "6R specific jackpot (symbol group F)", and "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G)" are won in the second special symbol, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The game state set after the end of the big hit game is different depending on the above. Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal game state, the time-saving game state, or the probabilistic game state, the probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game, and the game at the time of winning the big hit. When the state is the time latent probability change game state, the latent probability change game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. When shifting to the probabilistic game state after the end of the big hit game, the number of probability fluctuations is set to "100 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time is set to "100 times", and the number of times of easy entry is set to "100 times". When shifting to the probabilistic gaming state, the number of probability fluctuations is set to "100 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time is "100 times", and the number of times of easy entry is set to "0 times". Therefore, the probabilistic gaming state continues until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times), and the special symbol is continued. If the probability change game state ends when the fluctuation display number of When the game state ends, the game state shifts to the game state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends. Similarly, the latent probability change game state continues until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified number of STs (100 times), and is special. If the latent probability change game state ends when the number of times the symbol changes is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), the game shifts from the next special symbol change display to the normal game state, and the next big hit occurs. When the latent probability change game state ends with, the game state shifts to the game state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends.

When "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H)" is won in the second special symbol, the probabilistic gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When shifting to the probabilistic game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability variation number "100 times", the variation time shortening number "100 times", and the ball entry easy state number "100 times" are set. Therefore, the probabilistic gaming state continues until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times), and the special symbol is continued. If the probability change game state ends when the fluctuation display number of When the game state ends, the game state shifts to the game state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends.

When the "2R normal jackpot (symbol group I)" is won in the second special symbol, the time-saving gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability fluctuation number "0 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "70 times", and the ball entry easy state number "70 times" are set. Therefore, the time-saving gaming state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches a specific number of times (70 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specific number of times (70 times), and the special symbol changes. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of display times reaches a specific number of times (70 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next special symbol fluctuation display, and the time-saving game state changes when the next big hit occurs. When it ends, it shifts to the game state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends.

Subsequently, the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a comparison table of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the third embodiment. In this third embodiment, the variation pattern table of the special symbol is omitted, but in reality, as in the first embodiment, the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol is the special symbol. It is selected by referring to the fluctuation pattern table.

In the figure (A), the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the gaming state is the normal gaming state is shown. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to "3 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, and is set to "30 seconds to 90 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. ing. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to "10 minutes" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit or a miss, and is set to "30 seconds to 90 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. ing. That is, as for the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, an extremely long fluctuation time (10 minutes) is set as compared with other fluctuation times, except when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit.

In the figure (B), the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shown when the gaming state is the reduced working hours gaming state. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to "1 second to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, and "30 seconds to 60 seconds" is set when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. ing. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to "10 minutes" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a miss or a small hit, and is set to "30 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. ing. That is, as for the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, an extremely long fluctuation time (10 minutes) is set as compared with other fluctuation times, except when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit.

In the figure (C), the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state is shown. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to "1 second to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, and "30 seconds to 60 seconds" is set when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. ing. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to "0.5 seconds to 1 second" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a miss or a small hit, and "30 seconds to 60" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. It is set to "seconds". That is, for the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, an extremely short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) is set as compared with other fluctuation times, except when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. ..

In the figure (D), the variation display time of the special symbol when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state is shown. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to "1 second to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, and "30 seconds to 60 seconds" is set when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. ing. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to "10 minutes" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a miss or a small hit, and is set to "30 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. ing. That is, as for the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, an extremely long fluctuation time (10 minutes) is set as compared with other fluctuation times, except when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit. As a variation example, regarding the small hit variation display of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state, the time-saving gaming state, and the probabilistic gaming state, the variation time is, for example, "10 minutes", "11 minutes", "12 minutes", etc. It may be provided with a plurality of patterns of ultra-long fluctuations set for a very long time. Furthermore, regarding the display of the deviation variation of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state, the time-saving gaming state, and the probabilistic gaming state, for example, "10 minutes", "11 minutes", "12 minutes", etc., the variation time is extremely long. It may have a plurality of patterns of set ultra-long fluctuations.

Subsequently, the ordinary symbol lottery in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram used for explaining the ordinary symbol lottery in the second embodiment. (A) in the figure shows a normal symbol winning / failing lottery table, (B) in the figure shows a normal symbol variation pattern table, and (C) in the figure shows a normal electric accessory opening pattern table.

As shown in FIG. 55 (A), the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to "160/283" when the electric chew support function is not activated, and "282" when the electric chew support function is activated. / 283 "is set.

As shown in FIG. 55 (B), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to "20 seconds" when the electric chew support function is not activated, and "1 second" when the electric chew support function is activated. Is set to.

As shown in FIG. 55 (C), the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is set to "open for 0.1 seconds" when the electric chew support function is not activated, and the electric chew support function is activated. If so, it is set to "open for 4 seconds".

In the third embodiment of the configuration, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state), the gaming ball is raised by left-handed (launching the gaming ball aiming at the left region PA1). It is a game property in which the ball is entered into the starting port 51A and the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol) is independently executed. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the gaming ball can be entered into the second starting port 52 by right-handed (launching the gaming ball aiming at the right region PA1), but the second special Since the fluctuation time of the symbol is set to an extremely long time (because it takes a long time to finish the fluctuation display of the second special symbol), the game is played with extremely poor fluctuation efficiency, and the game is played by right-handed. It is better to let the game ball enter the upper first starting opening 51A by hitting the left side than to let the ball enter the second starting opening 52.

In addition, when the gaming state shifts to the reduced working hours gaming state (low probability high base state) or the probabilistic gaming state (high probability / high base state), the electric chew support function is activated to activate the lower first starting port 51B (normal electric motor). In order to increase the ease of entering the game ball into the accessory 512), the game ball is moved to the upper first starting port 51A or the lower first starting port 52 by hitting left (by launching the game ball aiming at the right area PA1). It becomes a game playability to proactively execute the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol) by entering the ball into the ball. If the game state is a short-time game state (low probability high base state) or a probabilistic game state (high probability / high base state), the game ball is hit right-handed (a game ball is launched aiming at the right area PA1). Can be put into the second starting port 52, but since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely long time (the time required for the variation display of the second special symbol to end becomes long). Therefore, it is necessary to play a game with extremely poor fluctuation efficiency, and rather than letting the game ball enter the second starting port 52 by hitting right, the game ball is moved to the upper first starting port 51A or the lower first starting port 51A by hitting left. It is better to let the ball enter 51B.

On the other hand, when the gaming state shifts to the latent probability changing gaming state (high probability low base state), the small hit game frequently occurs when the game ball enters the second starting port 52 (small hit). By performing RUSH), it is better to let the game ball enter the second starting port 52 by hitting right than to let the game ball enter the upper first starting port 51A by hitting left. It is a game that independently executes the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (variable display of the second special symbol).

Here, when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state, the gaming ball is inserted into the second starting port 52 to display the variation of the second special symbol with high frequency, as in the first embodiment described above. Until the next big hit occurs, the small hit game will be executed frequently. As a result, every time a small hit game is executed, about 2 to 3 game balls are put into the large winning opening 54, and about 20 to 30 prize balls are continuously acquired each time, so that the ball can be held. Can be increased.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the big hit is made only when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is the latent probability changing gaming state. The game state after the end of the game shifts to the latent probability change game state (small hit RUSH mode). The reason is that when the gaming state is a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, or a probabilistic gaming state, the variable display of the first special symbol is the main subject of the game, so the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit ( This is to ensure fair and equitable game by suppressing the transition to the latent probability change game state (small hit RUSH mode), which is the most advantageous state for the player in the case of (so-called accident hit). In addition, when a specific jackpot of the second special symbol occurs in the normal gaming state, by shifting to the probabilistic gaming state instead of the latent probabilistic gaming state, right-handed hitting in the normal gaming state (ball can be entered even in the normal gaming state). By acquiring a specific jackpot of the second special symbol by hitting right at the second starting port 52 where it is easy to enter the ball, a fraudulent act such as forcibly rushing from the normal gaming state to the latent probability changing gaming state (small hit RUSH mode). Can be prevented.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the time-saving gaming state, and the probabilistic gaming state, the left side region PA1 becomes the main area of the game, and the gaming state is the latent probabilistic gaming state. , The right area PA2 is the main area of the game. In the third embodiment as well, as in the first embodiment, regarding the prior determination for the operation holding ball of the special symbol, only the operation holding ball of the special symbol that is the main player of the game in each game state is preliminarily determined. It may be the target of judgment. That is, in the normal game state, the time-saving game state, and the probabilistic game state, only the operation hold ball of the first special symbol is subject to the pre-judgment, and in the latent probability change game state, only the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is pre-determined. It is preferable to target it. Further, in the third embodiment, regarding the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the fluctuation time of the special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is at least the main body of the game in the game state, is shortened. It suffices if it has been done. That is, in the third embodiment, it can be said that the function for shortening the variation time of the special symbol is operating in the gaming state (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, probability variation) in which the variation display of the first special symbol is the main game. If the variation time of the first special symbol is shortened in the game state), and the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened in the game state (latent probability variation game state) in which the variation display of the second special symbol is the main body of the game. good.

Subsequently, the symbol determination signal in the third embodiment will be described. Also in this third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, if the variable display of the first special symbol is the main game state, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped. If the symbol confirmation signal is turned on and the variation display of the second special symbol is a gaming state as a means of the game, the symbol confirmation signal is output on when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped. To.

Specifically, when the electric chew support function is not activated, the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol start operating at the same time, and then the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. If the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped before the confirmed display time (stop display time) elapses after the total stop is 100 times (specified ST number of times), the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. The symbol confirmation signal is not output on the trigger of the stop. That is, when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol becomes the main subject of the game, so that the symbol confirmation signal is output on when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped. Will not be done.

On the other hand, after the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol start operating at the same time when the electric chew support function is not activated, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is 100 in total. If the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped except until the confirmed display time (stop display time) has elapsed after stopping the number of times (specified ST number of times), the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped. The symbol confirmation signal is not output on as a trigger. That is, when the gaming state is a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, or a probabilistic gaming state, the variable display of the first special symbol becomes the main subject of the game, so that the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. , The symbol confirmation signal is not output on.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the portions having the same configuration. The explanation is omitted, and the different parts are mainly explained. That is, in the following description, except for special cases, it is possible to apply the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 56 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. On the front surface of the game board 20, the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42 are fixedly fixed in an arc shape, and a substantially circular game area PA on which the game ball can roll is formed as a section. A center decoration 21 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is visibly provided through the central opening of the center decoration 21. Further, the game area PA has a left side area PA1 which is a left side area of the center decoration 21 (a board area corresponding to left-handed hitting) and a right side area of the center decoration 21 (right-handed hitting) with the center decoration 21 in the center as a reference. It is partitioned into the right side area PA2 which is the board surface area corresponding to the above. An introduction passage 44 connecting the left side region PA1 and the right side region PA2 is provided in the upper part of the center decoration 21, so that the right-handed game ball can reach the right side region PA2 through the introduction passage 44. ing.

The first starting port 51 is arranged in the area below the center decoration 21. The first starting port 51 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and includes a first starting opening switch 511 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The first starting port 51A is a constantly open type winning opening that is open upward, and a game ball (a game ball hit to the left) that mainly flows down the left side region PA1 can enter. The entry of the game ball into the first starting port 51 triggers the first special symbol lottery.

The second starting opening 52 is arranged in the right area (right area PA2) of the center decoration 21, and the large winning opening 54 is arranged diagonally to the lower left of the second starting opening 52. ing. The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and includes a second starting opening switch 521 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The second starting port 52 is a constantly open type winning opening that is opened upward, and a game ball (a game ball hit to the right) that mainly flows down the right side region PA2 can enter. The entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 triggers the second special symbol lottery.

The large winning opening 54 is formed as a winning opening having a horizontally rectangular shape that is opened when the winning / failing lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. The large prize opening 54 is a large winning opening switch 541 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a special electric accessory 542 generally called an attacker, and a large prize for opening and closing the special electric accessory 542. It is equipped with a mouth solenoid 543. The special electric accessory 542 is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 54 or is difficult to enter. In special games (big hit game, small hit game), when launching a game ball, hitting the right area PA2 by aiming at the right side, so-called right-handed, makes it easier to enter the big winning opening 54. There is.

In the fourth embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side region PA1 can mainly enter the first starting port 51. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA2 can mainly enter the second starting opening 52 or the large winning opening 54. In the fourth embodiment, since the first starting port 51 and the second starting port 52 are configured as non-variable starting ports (normally open starting ports), ordinary electric accessories are mounted. Not.

Next, the jackpot type (breakdown of jackpots) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol jackpot symbol table as a breakdown of jackpots in the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 57 (A) is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, the symbol group, the jackpot type, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 of each round are set for the symbol random value per special symbol. They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol jackpot table, three types of jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, it is divided into a 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A), a 4R specific jackpot (symbol group B), and a 4R normal jackpot (symbol group C). In the 10R specific big hit (symbol group A), the specified number of rounds of the big hit game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. In the 4R specific jackpot (symbol group B) and the 4R normal jackpot (symbol group C), the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 4 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is. 28 seconds.

FIG. 57B is a diagram schematically showing the second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, for the special symbol per symbol random value, the symbol group, the jackpot type, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 of each round are displayed. They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot table, two types of jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, it is divided into a 10R specific jackpot (symbol group D) and a 4R normal jackpot (symbol group E). In the 10R specific big hit (symbol group D), the specified number of rounds of the big hit game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. In the 4R normal jackpot (symbol group E), the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 4 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds.

Subsequently, the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a comparison table of fluctuation times of special symbols in the fourth embodiment. In this fourth embodiment, the variation pattern table of the special symbol is omitted, but in reality, as in the first embodiment, the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol is the special symbol. It is selected by referring to the fluctuation pattern table.

In the figure (A), the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the gaming state is the first gaming state (low probability state) is shown. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to "3 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, and is set to "30 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. ing. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to "10 minutes" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit or a miss, and is set to "30 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. ing. That is, as for the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, an extremely long fluctuation time (10 minutes) is set as compared with other fluctuation times, except when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit.

In the figure (B), the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the gaming state is the second gaming state (high probability state) is shown. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to "1 second to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, and "30 seconds to 60 seconds" is set when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. ing. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to "0.5 seconds to 1 second" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a miss or a small hit, and "30 seconds to 60" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. It is set to "seconds". That is, for the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, an extremely short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) is set as compared with other fluctuation times, except when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. .. As a variation example, the small hit variation display of the second special symbol in the first gaming state is set to a long time such as "10 minutes", "11 minutes", "12 minutes", etc. It may have a plurality of patterns of ultra-long fluctuations. Furthermore, regarding the display of the deviation variation of the second special symbol in the first game state, the ultra-long variation set to a long time such as "10 minutes", "11 minutes", "12 minutes", etc. It may have a plurality of patterns.

In this fourth embodiment, as a plurality of types of gaming states, the jackpot probability is set to a relatively low probability (about 1/329) and the jackpot probability is relatively high (about 1 / 329). The second gaming state set in 80) is set. The first game state is a game state set after the end of the big hit game when the "4R normal big hit" is won as the big hit type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In addition, the second game state is a game set after the end of the big hit game when the "10R specific big hit" or "4R specific big hit" is won as the big hit type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is in a state.

When the gaming state is the first gaming state (low probability state), the gaming ball is entered into the first starting port 51 by left-handed (launching the gaming ball aiming at the left region PA1), and the first special It is a game that independently executes the hit / fail judgment of the symbol (variation display of the first special symbol). When the gaming state is the first gaming state, the gaming ball can be entered into the second starting port 52 by right-handed (launching the gaming ball aiming at the right region PA1), but the second special Since the fluctuation time of the symbol is set to an extremely long time (because it takes a long time to finish the fluctuation display of the second special symbol), the game is played with extremely poor fluctuation efficiency, and the game is played by right-handed. It is better to let the game ball enter the first starting opening 51 by hitting the left side than to let the ball enter the second starting opening 52.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is the second gaming state (high probability state), there is a characteristic game (small hit RUSH) in which the small hit game frequently occurs when the game ball enters the second starting port 52. By doing so, it is better to let the game ball enter the second starting port 52 by hitting right than to let the game ball enter the first starting port 51 by hitting left, and as a result, the second special symbol It is a game that independently executes the hit / fail judgment (variation display of the second special symbol). Therefore, also in this fourth embodiment, when the gaming state is the second gaming state, as in the above-mentioned first to third embodiments, the game ball enters the second starting port 52 as an opportunity. The small hit RUSH mode in which the small hit game frequently occurs is executed.

[Common transformation example]
Next, common modifications of the first to fourth embodiments will be described. The gaming machine according to this common modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine according to any one of the above-mentioned first embodiment to the fourth embodiment, and hereinafter, the same configuration is used. The same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted, and different parts will be mainly described.

<Common modification 1>
In the above embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, a normal probabilistic gaming machine that determines the presence / absence of the probabilistic transition based on the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the special symbol is adopted. It is not limited, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, it is judged whether or not there is a probability change transition depending on whether or not the game ball enters a specific area during the execution of the big hit game. A probabilistic gaming machine may be adopted. Further, as a modification of the gaming machine of the above embodiment, a probabilistic gaming state given as a trigger of a big hit with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, up to a preset limit number of times (upper limit number of times). Alternatively, a gaming machine having a limiter function for limiting the number of consecutive latent probability changing gaming states may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment, the number-cutting probability change machine in which the probability variation function of the special symbol continuously operates for a specified ST number of times (for example, 100 times) is exemplified, but the probability variation function of the special symbol is performed after the end of the big hit game. It may be configured as a normal probability change machine that continues until the next big hit occurs.

<Common deformation example 2>
In the above embodiment, a model having only one large winning opening in the game area has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a model having a plurality of large winning openings in the game area is applied. You may. In addition, when adopting a model equipped with a plurality of large winning openings, the above-mentioned V-probability changing gaming machine is provided with a specific area (probability fluctuation function operating area, V area) that triggers the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol. It may be equipped with two or more large winning openings, that is, a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening that does not have this specific area (probability fluctuation function operating area, V area). As an example of the board layout, the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening may be arranged substantially vertically or horizontally side by side in the right side area of the game area, or the first large winning opening may be arranged. The board area to be created and the board area in which the second large winning opening is arranged may be different areas. In that case, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) paid out when the game ball enters the first big prize opening and the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the second big winning opening. The number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) may be the same or different. Of the two big winning openings, the first major winning opening (or the second major winning opening) is for the big winning opening for small hit games, and the second big winning opening (or the first big winning opening) is for big hit games. It may be configured as a big winning opening. In that case, even if the number of prize balls (unit prize balls) of the big prize opening for small hit games is 10, the number of prize balls (unit prize balls) of the big prize openings for big hit games is 15. good.

<Common modification 3>
In the above-described embodiment, among a plurality of types of gaming states, the latent probability changing gaming state is defined as a gaming state in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. However, it is not limited to this, and the latent probability change gaming state is defined as a gaming state in which only the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated and the fluctuation time shortening function and the electric chew support function of the special symbol are not activated. You may. In addition, the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is divided into the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and the latent probability variation game state is divided into the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the first. 2 It may be defined as a gaming state in which the variable time shortening function of the special symbol is activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. In addition, even if the electric chew support function operates in synchronization with the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function (second special symbol fluctuation time shortening function), the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function (second special symbol fluctuation time) It may operate independently of the shortening function).

Next, in order to make it easier to clearly understand the technical significance of the above-described embodiments (first to fourth embodiments) and modified examples, the problems corresponding to the above-described embodiments and modified examples will be outlined.

In the conventional pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the above-mentioned hit / fail judgment corresponds to a small hit, it is known to execute a small hit game in which the earned profit is set to be relatively lower than that of the big hit game (for example). See "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-152370").

The conventional pachinko gaming machine has various gaming states such as a normal gaming state in which the winning probability of winning / failing is set to the normal probability, and an advantageous gaming state in which the winning probability of winning / failing is higher than the normal probability. It is known that in an advantageous gaming state, the symbol changes to the normal gaming state when the number of times the symbol changes is displayed reaches a predetermined number of times (see, for example, "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-182873").

In the conventional pachinko gaming machine, for example, there are various types such as a probabilistic gaming state in which the winning probability of winning / failing is increased, and a time-saving gaming state in which the efficiency of symbol variation for suggesting or notifying the result of winning / failing is enhanced. It is known to have a gaming state and notify the remaining number of symbol fluctuations until the gaming state ends (see, for example, "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-210759").

In the conventional pachinko gaming machine, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the gaming state after the end of the special game may differ depending on the type of the big hit symbol that is stopped and displayed at the end of the fluctuation display. It is known (see, for example, "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-120804").

It is known that conventional pachinko gaming machines output game information related to the operating status of the gaming machine as an external information signal to an external device arranged outside the gaming machine (for example, "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No." 2006-325753, "Patent Document 1).

In the conventional pachinko gaming machine, various gaming states such as a probabilistic gaming state in which the winning probability of winning / failing is increased and a time-saving gaming state in which the efficiency of symbol variation for suggesting or notifying the result of winning / failing is enhanced. (For example, refer to "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-115441").

However, since many pachinko gaming machines that adopt such a configuration already exist as conventional models, it is required to further improve the interest of the game in order to differentiate from the conventional models. ..

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the above embodiment and the modified example, the above-mentioned configuration is adopted for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, and the above-mentioned action and effect are achieved.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments and modifications, and can be appropriately improved as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. In addition, each component described in the above-described embodiment and modification is appropriately combined, or a part of each component described in the above-described embodiment and modification is deleted or converted by a well-known / conventional technique or the like. Also included in the scope of the present invention.

PM Pachinko game machine PA Game area PA1 Left area PA2 Right area 1 Outer frame 2 Front frame 5 Glass frame 20 Game board 51 1st starting port 52 2nd starting port 53 Acting gate 54 Large winning opening 70 Production display device 71 1st special Symbol display device 72 2nd special symbol display device 91 1st consecutive operation gate 92 2nd consecutive operation gate 100 Main control board 200 Production control board 300 Image control board 400 Payout control board 500 Power supply board 600 External information terminal board 511 1 Starting port switch 521 2nd starting port switch 531 Acting gate switch 541 Grand prize opening switch 911 1st winning combination operating gate switch 921 2nd winning combination operating gate switch

Claims (1)

A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port provided at a position different from the first starting port in the game area and where a game ball can enter, and a second starting port.
The first hit / fail determination means for executing the hit / fail determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port,
The second hit / fail determination means for executing the hit / fail judgment triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port,
A large winning opening provided in the game area, which is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means, and allows the game ball to enter.
A combination operating gate provided in the game area and through which a game ball can pass,
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means becomes a big hit, the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol indicating the big hit. After that, when the game ball passes through the combination operation gate, a special game execution means capable of executing a big hit game accompanied by opening of the big winning opening, and a special game execution means.
A low-probability state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means and the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means become a big hit with a predetermined probability, the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means, and the second. A lottery state control means capable of setting a low probability state or setting a high probability state, having a high probability state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail determination means is a big hit with a higher probability than the predetermined probability.
A first symbol display device in which the first symbol showing the result of the hit / fail determination by the first hit / fail determination means is variable-displayed and stopped-displayed, and
A second symbol display device in which the second symbol showing the result of the hit / fail determination by the second hit / fail determination means is variable-displayed and stopped-displayed, and
The first symbol display control means for variable display and stop display of the first symbol in the first symbol display device, and
A second symbol display control means for variable display and stop display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device, and
There is at least a first fluctuation state in which the average value of the fluctuation display time of the second symbol is a predetermined time, and a second fluctuation state in which the average value of the fluctuation display time of the second symbol is shorter than the predetermined time. Then, with a variable state control means capable of at least setting the first variable state or the second variable state,
An effect display device that displays an effect suggesting the result of the pass / fail determination by the first pass / fail determination means or the result of the pass / fail determination by the second pass / fail determination means.
A pachinko gaming machine provided with an effect determining means for determining an effect content to be displayed on the effect display device.
The first symbol or the above It has at least a predetermined external information signal that is output when the second symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol indicating the jackpot.
In the high probability state and the second fluctuation state, when the result of the hit / fail determination by the second hit / fail determination means becomes a big hit and the second symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol indicating the big hit, the game ball is said. While the predetermined external information signal is output after the stop display is displayed on the jackpot symbol without passing through the combined operation gate,
In the low probability state and the first fluctuation state, when the result of the hit / fail determination by the second hit / fail determination means becomes a big hit and the second symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol indicating the jackpot, the jackpot symbol is used. If the gaming ball does not pass through the winning combination operating gate after the stop display is displayed, the predetermined external information signal is not output, and if the gaming ball passes through the winning combination operating gate after the stop display is displayed with the jackpot symbol, the predetermined external information signal is output. A pachinko machine that is characterized by being output.

Images